JP6964933B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachislot machines and pachinko machines.

It has been proposed that a conventional gaming machine starts a game by operating a start lever after the gaming medium is inserted by operating a bet button or the like (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-202330

However, in such a gaming machine, if the start lever is operated before the loading of the gaming medium is completed, the operation of the start lever becomes invalid, so that the gaming operation is smooth depending on the player. There was a problem that there were some things that could not be done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing a gaming operation.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

<< First invention >>
A game value number determination unit (for example, main CPU 101) that determines a game value number to be used for a game, and
A start operation detection unit (for example, start switch 7S) that detects the start operation of the game, and
A game control unit (for example, the main control circuit 100) that controls the game, and
A determination operation detection unit (for example, bet switch 6S) that detects a determination operation for causing the game value number determination unit to determine the game value number to be used for the game from the game value number deposited in the game control unit.
With
The game control unit
In the state where the start operation is not detected by the start operation detection unit, the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit after the game value number is determined by the game value number determination unit. Start the game ,
In the state where the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, the game is started when the game value number is determined by the game value number determination unit to a specified number (for example, the maximum bet number).
In the operating state of the re-game, when the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, the determination operation is not detected from the detection operation detection unit. A gaming machine characterized by starting a replay.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the gaming operation can be smoothly performed.

It is a figure which shows the external structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the gametability of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows various tables of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows various tables of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this Embodiment, a stop operation mode, a display combination and the like. It is a figure for demonstrating the limit processing of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the winning flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the carry-over combination storage area of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game state flag storage area of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the mode flag storage area of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the operation stop button storage area of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the pressing order storage area of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on processing which is executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the medal acceptance / start check process executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery processing executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game start state control process executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the start of a game in an advantageous section executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control processing executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the state control process at the end of a game executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the end of a game in an advantageous section executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the periodic interrupt process executed by the main control circuit of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the medalless gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the main control board of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the main control circuit of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the latch signal generation circuit of the main control circuit of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game when the game is started from the state which the start lever is off in the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game when the re-game is started from the state which the start lever is off in the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game when the game is started from the state which the start lever is on in the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game when the re-game is started from the state which the start lever is on in the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the main control circuit of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows a part of the external structure suitable for the 2nd gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game when the game is started from the state which the start lever is on in the modification of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game when the re-game is started from the state which the start lever is on in the modification of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the main control circuit in the modification of the 2nd game machine which concerns on this embodiment.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachislot machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine.

[1. Structure of pachislot machine]
First, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Note that FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, for convenience of explanation, a part of the internal structure may be described in the following description of the external structure, and a part of the external structure may be described in the description of the internal structure.

[1-1. External structure]
[1-1-1. Housing]
The pachi-slot machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. Further, the housing 2 is arranged in a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as the main body of the gaming machine, an upper door mechanism UD arranged in the upper part of the front surface of the cabinet G, and a lower part of the front surface of the cabinet G. It also has a lower door mechanism DD.

The cabinet G has an intermediate support plate G1, a pair of left and right side walls G2, a back wall G3, a top wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. In addition, in FIGS. 1 and 2, the back wall G3 and the bottom wall G5 are not shown. Further, the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G is formed with two openings G4a penetrating in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. Then, a wooden plate member G4b is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G4a.

The plate member G4b is used to fix the pachislot machine 1 to a game island (not shown) when the pachislot machine 1 is installed in a game store, but as long as such a fixing method is secured, a metal material or a resin material is used. It can be formed of, or it can be integrally formed with the upper surface wall G4. Further, as long as a certain strength is secured for the cabinet G, a part or all of each component may be made of wood or a resin material.

Further, inside the cabinet G, an upper opening G101 that opens forward is formed on the upper side across the intermediate support plate G1, and a lower opening that opens forward on the lower side across the intermediate support plate G1. A side opening G102 is formed. That is, the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space with an intermediate support plate G1 sandwiched between them, and the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate for partitioning the inside of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. There is. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the main display device 210 and the like, which will be described later. Further, the lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the reel unit RU, the main control board 71, and the like, which will be described later.

The cabinet G does not necessarily have to include the intermediate support plate G1. That is, as long as each device or the like is appropriately accommodated in the cabinet G, the upper space and the lower space may not be partitioned. Further, the cabinet G can be simply referred to as a "box body" or a "main body", and since it functions as a frame body for supporting or fixing the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, the "main body frame" and "main body" are used. It can also be referred to as a "support", a "support frame", a "fixed frame", or the like.

[1-1-2. Front door]
The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G, and are provided so as to be able to close the upper space and the lower space of the opening in the cabinet G. That is, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD function as front doors (front doors) provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, each of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD is attached to the cabinet G so as to be openable and closable by, for example, an opening / closing mechanism (not shown) such as a hinge provided on the left side wall G2. One of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be opened and closed by the above-mentioned opening / closing mechanism, and the other can be attached / detached only when one of the door mechanisms is opened. You can also do it.

The upper door mechanism UD has an effect display window UD1 provided at the center thereof and an upper lamp 23 provided above the effect display window UD1. The effect display window UD1 is configured as, for example, a transparent resin panel, and the effect image displayed on the screen device C constituting the main display device 210 described later provided on the back side thereof can be visually recognized. In the present embodiment, the main display device 210 that displays the effect via the effect display window UD1 may be described as the main effect display unit 21.

The lower door mechanism DD has a main display window 4 provided at a substantially central portion of the upper portion thereof, and a reel unit RU on the back side of the main display window 4 and attached to the inner side of the cabinet G. There is.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel). Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is composed of, for example, a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent reel band mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body, and a plurality of reel bands (for example, 20) are included in the reel band. The symbols are drawn at predetermined intervals along the direction of rotation of the reel. Further, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are arranged in a parallel state (horizontal row) so that each reel can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. The main display window 4 is configured as, for example, a transparent resin panel, and at least a part (for example, three) of the symbols on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R can be visually recognized. Further, inside each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, a light source (reel lamp included in lamps / LEDs described later) is provided at least at a position where a symbol can be visually recognized from the main display window 4, and at least each reel 3L, When the 3C and 3R are rotating, the visibility of the design is ensured by illuminating them from the inside with a constant brightness.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has a sub-effect display unit 22 provided on the left side of the main display window 4 and an effect button 10b provided on the right side of the main display window 4. The sub-effect display unit 22 displays the effect image displayed on the sub-display device 220, which will be described later. It should be noted that the sub-effect display unit 22 can be configured as a touch panel and can function not only as a function of performing the effect display but also as one of the effect buttons. The effect button 10b is an operation unit that receives a player's effect operation (effect operation).

Further, the lower door mechanism DD is provided in a substantially horizontal pedestal portion formed below the main display window 4, a MAX bet button 6a, a 1-bet button 6b, and a settlement button 9 provided on the left side, and a substantially central portion. It has an effect button 10a provided and a medal insertion slot 5 provided on the right side.

The MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b are player's game operations (bet operation, "insertion operation" and "hanging operation") for using the (credited) medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. It is an operation unit that accepts (which can also be called "etc."). When the MAX bet button 6a is operated, if the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets (for example, 3) and the number of medals credited is greater than or equal to the difference, the maximum number of medals is bet. NS. On the other hand, if there are no more credited medals than the difference, the medals will not be bet. When the 1-bet button 6b is operated, the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, and if there is one or more credited medals, one medal is bet.

The settlement button 9 is an operation unit that accepts a player's game operation (settlement operation) for returning (settlement) a credited medal. If the checkout button 9 is operated without any credited medals, the credits for crediting the inserted or paid out medals within the creditable number (for example, 50). A player's game operation (C / P mode selection operation) for making it possible to select either a mode (C mode) or a pay mode (P mode) in which the medal is not credited may be accepted. That is, the settlement button 9 can be made to function as a so-called C / P button. The effect button 10a is an operation unit that receives a player's effect operation (effect operation).

The medal insertion slot 5 receives medals inserted into the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The accepted medal is detected by the selector 31 described later, and it is determined whether or not the medal is appropriate. If one received medal is not appropriate, the received medal is returned from the medal payment exit 11 described later. Further, if one received medal is appropriate and the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, one medal is bet. If the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets and the number of medals being credited has not reached the creditable number, one medal is credited. On the other hand, when the number of credited medals has reached the creditable number, the accepted medals are returned from the medal payment exit 11 described later.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has an information display unit 14 provided between the main display window 4 and the above-mentioned pedestal unit. The information display unit 14 is configured to include a plurality of lamps (LEDs) and 7-segment LEDs, and displays information related to the game depending on the lighting mode thereof.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD is provided below the above-mentioned pedestal portion with a start lever 7 provided on the left side, three stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R provided substantially in the center portion, and a right side. It has a locking mechanism 15. The start lever 7 is an operation unit that is tiltably attached within a predetermined angle range and receives a player's game operation (start operation) for starting the game. Each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and is an operation unit that receives a player's game operation (stop operation) for stopping each rotation.

The locking mechanism 15 is composed of, for example, a key cylinder lock, and when the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state, a manager on the game store side (for example, a clerk of the game store, the same applies hereinafter) has a door key (not shown) in the keyway. ) Is inserted and turned to the right to unlock and the lower door mechanism DD is opened. The locking mechanism 15 may have a function as a reset switch as well as a function of managing the opening and closing of the door mechanism. For example, when the manager on the game store side turns the door key counterclockwise with the door key inserted in the keyway, the reset operation similar to the reset switch 53 described later may be detectable. Further, in the present embodiment, when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state, the upper door mechanism UD can also be configured to be in the open state in conjunction with this, and the lock corresponding to the upper door mechanism UD can be locked. It is also possible to provide a mechanism separately so that the opening and closing can be controlled independently.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD includes a waist panel 13 provided in the central portion of the lower portion thereof, a medal tray 12 provided below the waist panel 13, and a medal payout outlet 11 provided above the medal tray 12. , It has sound transmission holes 24a and 24b provided on the left and right sides of the medal payout outlet 11.

The waist panel 13 includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information such as a logo representing the model name and a character representing a motif is drawn, and a light source for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side (for lamps and LEDs described later). Consists of a lumbar lamp included). The medal tray 12 stores medals paid out from the medal payout outlet 11. The medal payout outlet 11 discharges the medals paid out (or returned) from the inside of the pachislot machine 1 to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 11 include those paid out from the hopper device 32 described later and those returned from the selector 31 described later through a cancel chute (not shown). The sound transmission holes 24a and 24b are on the back side of each, and are the sound effects such as sound effects and BGM output from the speakers 35a and 35b (speakers 35a are omitted in FIG. 2) mounted on the inner side of the cabinet G. Is transmitted toward the front side of the pachislot machine 1.

In the present embodiment, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided corresponding to the partitioning of the inside of the cabinet G into the upper space and the lower space, but the opening in the cabinet G is appropriately provided. As long as it can be opened and closed, it can be configured as a single door mechanism, or it can be configured as three or more door mechanisms. Further, it can also be configured as a door mechanism (for example, an outer door and an inner door, etc.) that are doubly configured in the front-rear direction. Further, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be simply referred to as a "door" or a "door", and since they function as members that can open and close the opening in the cabinet G, the "opening and closing member" and the "door". It can also be referred to as a "member" or a "door member".

[1-1-3. Fluctuation display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a main display window 4. When the start lever 7 is operated (when the start operation is performed by the player), the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start rotating by driving and controlling the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R described later. As a result, the symbol displayed on the main display window 4 is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, when the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R are operated (when the stop operation is performed by the player), the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R described later are driven and controlled. By doing so, each rotation is stopped. As a result, the symbol displayed on the main display window 4 is stopped and displayed.

That is, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4 have a variable display unit (means) capable of variable display (and stop display) of a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, or a variable display (and stop display) of a plurality of symbols. ) Configure a plurality of possible variable display units (means). The variable display unit (means) can also be referred to as a "design display unit (means)", a "variable display unit (means)", or the like. Further, the design can be referred to as a "picture", a "pattern", or the like, and can also be referred to as "identification information" or the like in that sense as long as the information can be visually identified by the player.

Further, the main display window 4 is configured so that when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, three symbols arranged continuously for each are displayed in the frame. That is, the main display window 4 displays one symbol (three in total) in each of the upper, middle, and lower areas in each column (3 rows × 3 columns in the frame of the main display window 4). The design is displayed in the mode of). The main display window 4 may be referred to as a "design display area", a "window portion", or the like.

Further, an effective line is defined in the main display window 4. The valid line is a line for determining whether or not a specified combination of symbols is displayed when the symbols in all rows are stopped and displayed in response to the player's stop operation. In that sense, the effective line can also be referred to as a "winning line", a "judgment line", or the like. Further, the effective line is configured as a line connecting any of the areas of each column. That is, when the main display window 4 is configured to display a symbol in a mode of 3 rows × 3 columns, it is possible to define a maximum of 27 effective lines. However, in reality, one or more of these lines can be defined as valid lines, and the other lines can be defined as invalid lines that are not valid lines.

For example, the line connecting the middle stage region of the reel 3L, the middle stage region of the reel 3C, and the middle stage region of the reel 3R is the "center line", the upper stage region of the reel 3L, the upper stage region of the reel 3C, and the upper stage region of the reel 3R. The connecting line is the "top line", the lower area of the reel 3L, the lower area of the reel 3C, and the line connecting the lower area of the reel 3R is the "bottom line", the lower area of the reel 3L, the middle area of the reel 3C, and the reel 3R. The line connecting the upper area is called "cross-up line", the line connecting the upper area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called "cross-down line", and these are called "cross-down line". Since it is a line connecting each region with a straight line, one or more of these lines are often defined as effective lines. However, as described above, a so-called irregular line connecting each region of each column with a polygonal line can be defined as an effective line.

In addition, in order for the valid line to be activated, it is necessary to bet the number of medals required for this game (the number of medals that can be started) prior to the start operation of the player, but this is valid. The number of effective lines to be converted may be the same regardless of the number of bets, or may vary depending on the number of bets. For example, if the above-mentioned three lines of "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are defined as valid lines, in the former case, the number of bets is any of 1 to 3. Even so, ensure that the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are enabled. On the other hand, in the latter case, if the number of bets is 1, only the "center line" is activated, if the number of bets is 2, the "center line" and the "top line" are activated, and the number of bets is 3. If (maximum number of bets), enable "center line", "top line", and "bottom line".

In the present embodiment, the variable display unit has three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a main display window 4 capable of displaying three symbols in each column, whereby three rows × 3 Although the symbols are displayed in the form of columns, the pattern display mode in the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, the number of reels is 1, 2, or 4 or more, and the number of symbols displayed in each row is 1, 2, or 4 or more, which is different from the above aspect. You can also display the design with. In this case, the number of valid lines that can be defined is also increased or decreased as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display unit is supposed to display the symbol in a variable manner by rotating each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, but the configuration of the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, a configuration using an image display device similar to the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220 described later may be used, or a configuration using other display devices (for example, an organic EL, a 7-segment LED, etc.) may be used. .. Further, for example, a configuration using another physical device (for example, a belt or the like) may be used. In addition, the arrangement and size of the variable display unit can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation display unit functions as a main side display unit directly related to the game, which is controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later. A variable display unit as a sub-side display unit related to an effect not directly related to the game, which is controlled by the game, may be provided. The sub-side display unit may be configured by using, for example, a main display device 210 or a sub-display device 220. That is, a variable display unit that fluctuates and displays the symbol according to the player's start operation (or other start condition is satisfied) and stops and displays the symbol according to the player's stop operation (or other stop condition is satisfied). As a result, not only the main display unit but also the sub display unit may be provided. In this case, in order to enable the player to identify whether or not the variable display unit is directly related to the game, characters such as "rotary cylinder" or "main reel" are placed in the vicinity of the main display unit. It suffices to attach an identification display in which is displayed so that the variable display unit can be identified as the main display unit. It should be noted that such an identification display may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220.

[1-1-4. Medal slot]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a medal insertion slot 5 for receiving medals to be inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by a player. Since the medal insertion slot 5 and the selector 31 described later have a function of betting the number of medals required for one game, like the MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b, such an insertion operation is performed. , For example, it can be paraphrased as a betting operation. Therefore, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 5 is a bet operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting a player's bet operation. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal slot can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, the configuration is not necessarily indispensable.

In the present embodiment, it is described as an example that a medal as a game medium is used as a game value used for a game or given according to a game result, but the game value used in this way is Not limited to this. For example, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be used. Further, the game value can be simply referred to as "value", "game value", or the like.

[1-1-5. Operation unit]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following operation units as operation units that can be operated by the player. It should be noted that each of the operation units shown below is merely an example, and may be configured to include operation units different from these, and of these, operation units that are not necessarily essential may not be provided. ..

[1-1-5-1. Bet button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a MAX bet button 6a and a 1-bet button 6b that accept a player's betting operation for using the (credited) medal deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. Further, such a betting operation is detected by the betting switch 6S described later. Therefore, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1-bet button 6b, and the bet switch 6S form a bet operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the bet operation of the player. The bet button only needs to be able to detect the betting operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b are provided, but only the MAX bet button 6a may be provided without providing the 1-bet button 6b. Further, a 2-bet button on which two medals are bet may be provided separately.

[1-1-5-2. Start lever]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a start lever 7 that receives a player's start operation for starting the game. Further, such a start operation is detected by the start switch 7S described later. Therefore, the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S form a start operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the start operation of the player. The start lever only needs to be able to detect the start operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-3. Stop button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and includes each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R for receiving a player's stop operation for stopping each rotation. Further, such a start operation is detected by the stop switch 8S described later. Therefore, each of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R and the stop switch 8S constitutes a stop operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the stop operation of the player. The stop button only needs to be able to detect the player's stop operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-4. Settlement button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a settlement button 9 that accepts a player's settlement operation (return operation) for returning (settlement) a credited medal. Further, such a settlement operation is detected by the settlement switch 9S described later. Therefore, the settlement button 9 and the settlement switch 9S constitute a settlement operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the settlement operation of the player. The settlement button only needs to be able to detect the settlement operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-5. Button for production]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes effect buttons 10a and 10b for receiving the effect operation of the player. It should be noted that such an effect operation is detected by a detection switch (not shown) provided corresponding to each effect button. Therefore, the effect buttons 10a and 10b and the detection switch constitute an effect operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the effect operation of the player. It should be noted that the effect button only needs to be able to detect the effect operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the two effect buttons 10a and 10b are provided, but they can be configured without any of them, or only one of them can be provided. can. Further, it may be configured to provide three or more effect buttons.

The main uses of the effect button are to change the effect mode when executing a specific effect (for example, an operation-linked effect described later), to perform a selection / decision operation in a user menu described later, and the like. Therefore, it can be configured to provide an effect button according to the application. For example, in the former application, the effect buttons 10a and 10b are used, and in the latter application, the above-mentioned touch panel can be used. In addition, in order to use it for the latter purpose, it is also possible to provide a jog dial, a cross key, or the like capable of accepting selection / decision operations as another effect button.

[1-1-6. Medal payment exit]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a medal payout outlet 11 for discharging medals to be paid out (or returned) from the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside. When a prize is generated and the medal is paid out, the medal payout outlet 11 gives the player the medal paid out from the hopper device 32, which will be described later. It can be said that it is a part of the means. In addition, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal payout outlet can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, the configuration is not necessarily indispensable.

[1-1-7. Medal saucer]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a medal tray 12 for storing medals paid out from the medal payout outlet 11. That is, the medal tray 12 constitutes a storage unit (means) capable of storing the given game value. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal tray can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, the configuration is not necessarily indispensable.

[1-1-8. Lumbar panel]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information is drawn and a waist panel 13 composed of a waist lamp for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side. The waist panel 13 basically indicates to the player what kind of model the pachislot machine 1 is, but for example, depending on the lighting mode of the waist lamp or the waist panel 13 itself. Can be configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing the effect by configuring the above with an image display device or the like.

[1-1-9. Information display section]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes an information display unit 14 that displays information about the game depending on the lighting mode thereof. That is, the information display unit 14 constitutes an information display unit (means) capable of displaying information related to the game.

The information display unit 14 includes, for example, an insert lamp, a start lamp, a replay lamp, a bet number lamp, a credit lamp, a payout number lamp, an instruction monitor, a limit lamp, and the like.

The insert lamp lights up to indicate that medals can be inserted. When the start lamp lights up, it indicates that the game can be started by operating the start lever 7. The replay lamp lights up to indicate that medals have been automatically inserted due to the operation of the replay. The bet number lamp lights up to indicate the number of medals bet. The credit lamp displays the number of medals credited according to the lighting mode. The payout number lamp displays the number of medals (payout number) paid out according to the game result according to the lighting mode.

Further, the instruction monitor includes a notification lamp (stop operation display unit) and a section lamp (status display unit). The notification lamp lights up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified in a situation where the information of the stop operation is notified to the player (for example, AT state), so that the information of the stop operation is information. Is displayed. The "mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified" is, for example, the push order (in this embodiment, this may be described as "hit order") "1st (first stop operation). When notifying the reel 3L) ”, the numerical value“ 1 ”is displayed on the instruction monitor, and when the push order“ 2nd (performing the first stop operation on the reel 3C) ”is notified. Displays the numerical value "2" on the instruction monitor, and displays the numerical value "3" on the instruction monitor when notifying the push order "3rd (performing the first stop operation on the reel 3R)". That is. The notification lamp does not necessarily have to be provided separately from the credit lamp and the payout number lamp. For example, either the credit lamp or the payout number lamp may be used to display the stop operation information.

As described above, in the present embodiment, under the situation where the information of the stop operation is notified to the player, the sub-side notification means controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 described later (for example, the main effect display unit 21). Not only that, the information of the stop operation is also notified in the instruction monitor as the main side notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100 described later. The mode of notification in the main side notification means and the mode of notification in the sub-side notification means may be different from each other. That is, the main side notifying means may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation. For example, when the push order "1st" is notified, even if the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, there is a possibility that the notification content cannot be specified depending on the player. On the other hand, the sub-side notification means may directly notify the information of the stop operation. For example, when the push order "1st" is notified, the main effect display unit 21 may directly notify the instruction information for causing the reel 3L to perform the first stop operation.

In addition, the section lamp lights up to indicate that the current state is in the advantageous section described later. For example, when the section lamp shifts from the non-advantageous section described later to the advantageous section, the section lamp lights up at an arbitrary timing until the game of the advantageous section starts, and the section ramp ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section. At that time, the light is turned off at an arbitrary timing until the game of the non-advantageous section is started. The lighting timing of the section lamp is not limited to this. For example, when shifting from a later-described effect section (normally advantageous section) in a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section to a later-described increasing section (AT state) in an advantageous section, any game until the game of the increased section is started. It may be turned on at the timing. That is, the section ramp may inform that the section is in the advantageous section regardless of whether it is the production section or the increase section, or at least the advantageous section including this from the start of the first increase section. It may inform the period until the end of.

In addition, the limit lamp indicates that the limit processing described later has been executed or the possibility thereof depending on the lighting mode. For example, when the limit process is executed, the light turns on to notify the player that the state advantageous to the player (for example, the AT state) has been forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process. Further, for example, blinking when the execution of the limit processing is near indicates that the advantageous state is likely to be forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit processing. In addition to these, by providing an opportunity to turn on, blink, or turn off, other information regarding limit processing can be appropriately reported.

[1-1-10. Production display section]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a main effect display unit 21 and a sub effect display unit 22 for displaying the effect image. The main effect display unit 21 and the sub effect display unit 22 constitute an effect display unit (means) capable of performing the effect display. In addition, it is configured as one of the effect execution means capable of executing the effect from a visual point of view to the player.

The main effect display unit 21 includes a main display device 210 that displays an effect via the effect display window UD1. Further, the main display device 210 includes a display unit A that is replaceably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G, an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display, and irradiation from the irradiation unit B. It is configured as a so-called projection mapping device having a screen device C that causes an image to appear when irradiated with light. In the present embodiment, the main display device 210 is configured in this way to enable advanced and powerful effect display, but the configuration of the main display device 210 is not limited to this. That is, it suffices as long as it is possible to perform an effect from a visual point of view for the player, and it can be configured as a liquid crystal display device, an image display device such as an organic EL, a display device such as a 7-segment LED, a sub reel, or the like. It can also be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. From this point of view, the shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is, for example, playable mainly to be entertained by a so-called roll, the main effect display unit 21 may not be provided (sub effect display unit). 22 is the same).

The sub-effect display unit 22 includes a sub-display device 220. Further, the sub display device 220 is configured as a liquid crystal display device. Similar to the main display device 210, the sub display device 220 can be configured as another image display device or display device, or can be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. From this point of view, the shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, since the main effect display unit 21 is composed of a large screen, it mainly displays effects closely related to the current game such as push order notification, hit notification, continuous effect, etc., and is a sub effect display unit. Since 22 is composed of a small screen, it is possible to display the display contents separately according to the purpose, such as mainly displaying an effect that is not so closely related to the current game such as a game history. It is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, two effect display units, a main effect display unit 21 and a sub effect display unit 22, are provided, but it is also possible to configure without providing any of these. It can also be configured to provide only one of them. Further, it may be configured to provide three or more effect display units.

[1-1-11. lamp]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes not only its light emitting mode (lighting, blinking, or extinguishing) but also its brightness and light emitting color when configured as a full-color LED, like the upper lamp 23 given as an example. ) Is provided with one or more lamps (light emitting means) capable of producing the effect. Further, such a light emitting means is configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing the effect from a visual viewpoint to the player. From this point of view, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

Other lamps included in the lamps and LEDs described later include, for example, side lamps provided on both end faces of the upper door mechanism UD and both end faces of the lower door mechanism DD, and operation units provided in each operation unit. Lamps and the like can be mentioned. Since the latter includes a function of notifying the player whether or not each operation unit can be operated, the light emitting mode is not changed according to the content of the effect when such a function is exerted. , It can be controlled to emit light according to a unique light emitting mode.

[1-1-12. Speaker]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes speakers 35a and 35b that output sound effects and sounds such as BGM. The speakers 35a and 35b constitute an audio output means capable of producing an effect by outputting audio. In addition, it is configured as one of the effect execution means capable of performing the effect from an auditory point of view to the player. From this point of view, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-13. Other production equipment]
The pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with an effect device other than the above-mentioned various effect devices (effect execution means). For example, it is possible to provide an effect device such as a movable effect device such as a so-called accessory, a vibration effect device that produces an effect by vibration, or an air effect device that produces an effect by injecting air, and execute the effect. That is, a production device capable of appealing to any of the player's five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, taste, and smell) (making the player recognizable that the production is being performed). If so, any of them can be used. Therefore, in the present embodiment, "execution of the effect" means that, unless otherwise specified, any of the above-mentioned various effect devices (effect execution means) is used for the effect. Indicates that you may execute.

[1-2. Internal structure]
[1-2-1. selector]
The selector 31 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2) is a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion port 5, and is provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD. The selector 31 has, for example, a medal sensor 31S described later and a sorting device.

The medal sensor 31S detects the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 5, and determines whether or not the detected medals are appropriate medals. When the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is an appropriate medal and the medal can be accepted, the distribution device moves the medal to the hopper device 32 side, which will be described later. The drive is controlled so as to be guided. In this case, the number of bets or the number of credits is added by 1. On the other hand, when the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is not an appropriate medal, or when the medal cannot be accepted, the distribution device passes the medal through the cancel shoot to the medal payout exit 11. It is driven and controlled so that it can be returned from. If an abnormality occurs in the medal detection by the medal sensor 31S, a selector error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, medal clogging).

That is, the selector 31 constitutes a game medium detection unit (means) capable of detecting the inserted game medium. Further, the selector 31 constitutes a determination means capable of determining whether or not the inserted game medium is appropriate. Further, the selector 31 constitutes a distribution means that stores the inserted game medium inside when it is appropriate, and discharges it to the outside when the inserted game medium is not appropriate. Further, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the selector 31 can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, the configuration is not necessarily indispensable.

[1-2-2. Hopper device]
The hopper device 32 is provided in the lower space in the cabinet G. The hopper device 32 is provided, for example, with a bucket portion for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 5 and guided by the selector 31, and a medal stored at the bottom of the bucket portion while stirring the medals. It has a disc unit that guides the medals to the discharge unit one by one, a discharge unit that discharges the medals guided by the disc unit one by one, and a count sensor that counts the medals discharged from the discharge unit.

The bucket section is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. The medals exceeding a certain number are guided to the medal auxiliary storage 33, which will be described later, through the guide passage provided on the upper surface side. If the medals stored in the bucket are empty, a hopper empty error will occur. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after replenishing the medals.

A plurality of medal-shaped hollow portions are formed radially from the center of the disc portion, and the central axis is rotationally driven according to a drive signal to guide the medals fitted in the hollow portions to the discharge portion one by one. The rotation of the disk portion agitates the medals stored in the bucket portion. Further, if an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the disk portion, a hopper jam error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, medal clogging).

The count sensor detects the medals ejected from the ejection unit and counts the number of medals. For example, when paying out one medal, the disc unit starts rotating, and then the rotation of the disc unit stops according to the count sensor counting the payout of one medal. In this way, an appropriate number of medals are paid out.

That is, the hopper device 32 constitutes a game medium payout unit (means) capable of paying out the game medium. Further, as described above, it can be said that it is a part of the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player. Further, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the hopper device 32 can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, the configuration is not necessarily indispensable.

[1-2-3. Medal auxiliary storage]
The medal auxiliary storage 33 is provided in the lower space in the cabinet G. The medal auxiliary storage 33 is, for example, a storage unit for storing medals guided from the bucket portion of the hopper device 32, and a medal auxiliary storage provided near the storage unit to detect the capacity of the medals stored in the storage unit. It has a storage switch 33S.

The storage unit is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. When it is determined by the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S that a certain number or more of the medals have been stored, a medal auxiliary storage error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after reducing the number of medals stored in the storage unit to at least a certain number.

That is, the medal auxiliary storage 33 constitutes a surplus game medium storage unit (means) capable of storing the surplus game medium. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal auxiliary storage 33 can be changed as appropriate. Further, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine described later, the configuration is not necessarily indispensable.

[1-2-4. Power supply]
The power supply device 34 is provided in the lower space in the cabinet G. The power supply device 34 has, for example, a power supply board 34a and a power supply switch 34b, and supplies electric power to the pachislot machine 1 when the power supply switch 34b is turned on. The power supply device 34 converts the AC voltage 100V power supplied from the power cable (not shown) into the DC voltage power required for each part, and supplies the converted power to each part, as in the case of household electric products. do. That is, the power supply device 34 constitutes a power supply unit (means) capable of supplying the required electric power to the gaming machine. The configuration, arrangement, size, and the like of the power supply device 34 can be changed as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, the setting key type switch 52 and the reset switch 53 described later are configured to be provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case described later). The switch can also be configured to be provided in the power supply 34.

[1-2-5. substrate]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following substrates as substrates necessary for various controls. It should be noted that each of the substrates shown below is merely an example, and may be configured to include a substrate different from these, or a substrate that is not necessarily essential among these may be configured not to be provided.

[1-2-5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 71 is mounted on the back side of the reel unit RU in the cabinet G. The main control board 71 is a game control board that controls games, and is inside a resin main control board case (not shown) that is transparent (or substantially transparent) so that its state can be visually recognized. Is housed in. The electrical configuration of the main control board 71 will be described later.

The specifications of the main control board 71 have various restrictions, and basically, various electronic components are DIP-mounted, but some or all of the various electronic components are SMT-mounted (surface mount). It may be configured by being implemented). Further, in this case, a test point for confirming the operation may be provided using a tester or an oscilloscope. Further, small electronic components not exceeding 6 mm2 may be used for a part or all of various electronic components. Further, the substrate surface of the main control substrate 71 may be multi-layered.

[1-2-5-2. Sub-control board]
The sub-control board 72 is attached to the back surface side of the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The sub-control board 72 is an effect control board that controls the effect, and is housed in a resin sub-control board case (not shown). The sub-control board case can be configured as a resin case made of transparent (or substantially transparent) like the main control board case, or another material made of opaque (or substantially opaque). It can also be configured as a case using. The electrical configuration of the sub-control board 72 will be described later.

[1-2-5-3. Other boards]
(Main relay board)
The main relay board 73 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2) is attached to a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), and is mainly controlled by various devices connected to the main relay board 73. It is an intermediate control board for relaying between the board 71 and between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Since the main relay board 73 is configured as a board different from the main control board 71 for the convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, all the functions of the main relay board 73 are mainly controlled unless there is a particular problem. It is also possible to provide the main relay board 73 on the board 71 without providing the main relay board 73. Further, from such a viewpoint, the main relay board 73 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve the control efficiency and the wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of boards may be provided as the main relay board.

(Secondary relay board)
The sub-relay board 74 is attached to a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), and is located between various devices and the like connected to the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72. It is an intermediate control board for relaying between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Since the sub-relay board 74 is configured as a board separate from the sub-control board 72 for the convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, all the functions of the sub-relay board 74 are sub-controlled unless there is a particular problem. It is also possible to support the board 72 without providing the sub-relay board 74. Further, from such a viewpoint, the sub-relay board 74 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve the control efficiency and the wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of boards may be provided as the sub-relay board.

(External centralized terminal board)
The external centralized terminal plate 55 is attached to a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, the inner side of the lower space), and for example, signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, and a security signal are transmitted. Output to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The output start conditions and output end conditions of the external signals 1 to 4 can be appropriately set, and the transition of the internal state (for example, bonus state or AT state) of the pachi-slot machine 1 can be set to the outside according to the game playability. It is possible to inform. Since the external centralized terminal plate 55 is usually connected to an external data display or hall computer, not only the status of inserting / paying medals and the status of error occurrence in the pachislot machine 1 also in these devices. , The transition status of such an internal state can be recognized.

(Interface board for testing machine)
The first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine are both relay boards used when outputting various signals related to the game to the testing machine in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot machine 1. (Since these relay boards are not mounted on the pachislot machine 1 as a release product for sale, the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 301 for the tester and the second interface board for the tester. The various electronic components needed to connect to the interface board 302 are also not mounted). For example, a test signal for controlling a main operation related to a game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) is output via a first interface board 301 for a testing machine, and is determined by a main control board 71. The test signal and the like related to the pushed order navigation are output via the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

[2. Electrical configuration of pachislot machines]
Subsequently, the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachislot machine 1.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71, a sub control board 72, a main relay board 73, and a sub relay board 74. The main control board 71 and the main relay board 73, the main relay board 73 and the sub relay board 74, and the sub relay board 74 and the sub control board 72 are electrically connected to each other. Further, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are electrically connected to the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 via the main relay board 73 and the sub relay board 74 so that serial communication in one direction is possible from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72. Is connected.

The main control circuit 100 as a game control unit that controls the game is mounted on the main control board 71. The main control circuit 100 includes, for example, a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown), a random number circuit (not shown), and the like. The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program. The clock pulse generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU 101. The random number circuit generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse signal. In addition, one or a plurality of values are extracted as random numbers from the generated random numbers as needed. In this way, control related to the overall game operation is performed.

On the sub-control board 72, a sub-control circuit 200 as an effect control unit that controls the effect is mounted. The sub-control circuit 200 includes, for example, a sub CPU 201, a sub RAM 203, and the like. Further, the ROM cartridge board 202 is connected to the sub control board 72. On the ROM cartridge board 202, various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, various data tables, various production data (for example, video data and drive data related to the main display device 210, video data related to the sub display device 220, lamps, etc. Lamp data related to the LED group, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.) are stored. The sub RAM 203 includes a storage area for registering the effect contents and various effect data determined by executing the control program, a storage area for storing data related to various control commands (commands) transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like. Provided. The production random number value related to the production may be generated and extracted in the sub CPU 201 from a predetermined range of random numbers (for example, 0 to 32767, etc.), or may be main control. A random number circuit may be provided in the same manner as the circuit 100 so that the generation and extraction thereof can be performed. Further, the sub ROM may be included in the sub control circuit 200 instead of the ROM cartridge board 202, and various control programs and the like may be stored in the sub ROM. Further, the ROM cartridge board 202 may be configured to store various effect data, and the sub ROM in the sub control circuit 200 may be configured to store various control programs and various data tables. Further, the sub-control circuit 200 includes an image-dedicated microprocessor such as a GPU (also referred to as “VDP”), whereby the image displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220 is displayed. May be configured to generate (edit).

The main control board 71 includes stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, setting key type switch 52, reset switch 53, role ratio monitoring device 54, external centralized terminal board 55, hopper device 32, medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, and power supply. The device 34 is electrically connected. Further, on the main control board 71, a door open / close monitoring switch 56, a medal sensor 31S, a bet switch 6S, a start switch 7S, a stop switch 8S, a settlement switch 9S, and an information display device 14 are electrically connected via a main relay board 73. It is connected to the. If the first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine are mounted, they are electrically connected to the main control board 71 via, for example, the main relay board 73.

The external centralized terminal plate 55, the hopper device 32, the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, the power supply device 34, the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, the stop switch 8S, the settlement switch 9S, the information display device 14, and the testing machine. Since the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine have already been described, the description here will be omitted.

Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is connected to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio, and each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is rotated and stopped by its drive. Since each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant angle each time one pulse is output for each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, the main CPU 101 uses each stepping motor 51L, The number of times the pulse is output to the 51C and 51R is counted, and the symbol positions of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R are managed based on the count result. Further, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is provided with a reel index (not shown) that determines an initial position for performing such management, and an index sensor (not shown) for detecting the position of the reel index. ..

The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, setting 1 to 6 in 6 steps) (setting change) or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot machine 1 (setting confirmation). Used for. Here, the set value indicates the degree of the player's advantage in the game, and usually, the lower the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 1), the relative the degree of the player's advantage. The lower the value and the higher the setting value (for example, the closer to the setting 6), the higher the degree of advantage of the player. The setting key type switch 52 is turned on when, for example, the administrator of the game store inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyway and turns it counterclockwise from the initial position, and returns it from the state where it is turned counterclockwise to the initial position. And turn off. When the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is off, if the setting key type switch 52 is turned on and then the power is turned on, the setting can be changed, and the pachi-slot machine 1 is set while the power is on. When the key type switch 52 is turned on, the setting can be confirmed.

The reset switch 53 can detect a reset operation by the administrator on the game store side. The reset operation is an operation for canceling various error states. Further, the reset switch 53 can detect a set value determination operation by the administrator on the game store side in a state where the setting can be changed. If the reset switch 53 is operated in a state where the setting can be changed, the set value is sequentially increased by 1 each time the setting is changed (when the setting 6 is reached, the setting returns to the setting 1). In this way, the set value determination operation can be performed. Further, the set value determined in this way is determined when the start lever 7 is operated once thereafter. That is, the start switch 7S can detect the set value confirmation operation by the administrator on the game store side. In this way, when changing the setting, the setting key type switch 52 is turned on, the reset switch 53 is operated to select the set value, and the start lever 7 is operated to confirm the selected set value. After that, a setting change operation such as turning off the setting key type switch 52 is required. Note that this is an example of a setting change operation, and the setting can be changed by another operation. Further, when changing the setting or confirming the setting, for example, the current set value may be displayed on the credit lamp or the payout number lamp described above.

The role ratio monitoring device 54 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED and is provided inside the main control board case. The combination ratio monitoring device 54 sequentially displays various ratio information related to the game aggregated and calculated by the main CPU 101. These ratio information is used when the manager of the game store confirms whether or not the pachislot machine 1 has been tampered with. The combination monitoring device 54 may be mounted on the main control board 71, or may be mounted on another board (for example, a ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71. You may. Further, if it is in the cabinet G, it may be provided in another place. For example, it may be provided on the main control board case. Further, even if the display on the combination ratio monitoring device 54 is started or a management switch for switching the contents thereof is provided in the cabinet G so that the above-mentioned various ratio information is displayed when this is operated. good. Further, on the premise that such a management switch is used, for example, the information display device 14 may be used in combination with the role ratio monitoring device 54. Further, immediately after the power is turned on or after a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds, which is a buffer time considering the time required for starting the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200) has elapsed from the power on, the combination monitoring device 54 In order to make it possible to confirm that the 4-digit 7-segment LED is functioning normally, for example, a test pattern such as "8.8." (a pattern in which all seg and desimal LEDs are lit) is specified. It is desirable to have a configuration that lights (or blinks) for a period of time.

In the role ratio monitoring device 54, for example, the type of the ratio information is displayed in the upper two digits, and the value (%) indicating the ratio information is displayed in the lower two digits. Here, the various ratio information displayed on the combination ratio monitoring device 54 includes, for example, the cumulative specific section ratio information, the continuous character ratio information and the character ratio information between the latest 6000 games, and the cumulative continuous character ratio information. And there is information on the proportion of characters.

The specific section ratio information is a stop operation that is advantageous to the player in the game section of the target number of games (for example, 175,000 games if it is "cumulative", 6000 games if it is "most recent 6000 games", and the same applies hereinafter). This is information indicating the ratio of the number of games (or simply the number of games in the advantageous section) in the game section (for example, the AT state) in which the information of the above was notified. Further, the continuous character ratio information is the number of medals paid out in the game section of the target number of games, during the operation of the first-class special character (RB) (continuous character related to the first-class special character). This is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the first-class special accessory (RB) in the operating state of the operating device (BB). In addition, the bonus character ratio information includes the first-class special bonus (RB), the second-class special bonus (CB), and the ordinary bonus (SB) among the number of medals paid out in the game section of the target game number. ) Is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation, and here, the operation of the first-class special accessory (RB) means the continuous operation device for the first-class special accessory (RB). It is a concept including the operation of the first-class special accessory (RB) in the state where the BB) is operating, and the operation of the second-class special accessory (CB) is the second-class special accessory. It is a concept including the operation of the type 2 special accessory (CB) in the state where the accessory continuous actuating device (MB) is operating.

In addition, the game section (for example, AT state) in which the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified is regarded as the operation of the accessory or the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and in each ratio information. It can also be the target of aggregation and calculation. That is, the combination / ratio monitoring device 54 may only appropriately display the necessary ratio information, and the various ratio information that can be displayed is not limited to these. Further, for example, when displaying the continuous accessory ratio information on a model not equipped with the first-class special accessory (RB), or displaying the specific section ratio information on a model not equipped with the advantageous section function (AT function). For models that do not have the corresponding numerical information (corresponding information), such as when displaying, the last two digits that display the numerical information (% information indicating the ratio) of the 4-digit 7-segment LED when displaying the item. In the 7-segment LED of No. 1, for example, by performing identification display for non-correspondence information such as lighting and displaying the two vertical bars in the center, it is confirmed that the model does not have correspondence information. It is desirable that the person can recognize it at a glance.

The door open / close monitoring switch 56 is provided, for example, on the open / close side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. In addition, it may be configured to be provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD, or may be configured to be provided on the cabinet G side. Further, the upper door mechanism UD may be configured to be provided with a similar door open / close monitoring switch. The door open / close monitoring switch 56 monitors the opening / closing of the lower door mechanism DD by turning on when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state and turning off when the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state. When the door open / close monitoring switch 56 is turned on, a door open error occurs. In this case, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the error state is released.

The ROM cartridge board 202, the main display device 210, and the sub display device 220 are electrically connected to the sub control board 72. Further, the sub-control board 72 is provided with a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 61, a group of production buttons such as effect buttons 10a and 10b, lamps / LEDs such as the upper lamp 23, and a speaker 35a via the sub-relay board 74. A group of speakers such as 35b is electrically connected.

Since the ROM cartridge board 202, the main display device 210, the sub display device 220, the effect button group, the lamps / LEDs, and the speaker group have already been described, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 61 is provided, for example, on the open / close side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD, similarly to the door open / close monitoring switch 56. The door opening / closing monitoring switch 56 is the same as the door opening / closing monitoring switch 56 in that it has a function of monitoring the opening / closing of the lower door mechanism DD. The opening / closing history of the door mechanism DD can be stored for a certain period of time. The opening / closing history can be confirmed from the hall menu described later. Therefore, for example, if there is an opening history after the manager of the game store leaves after business hours, or if there is an opening / closing history that has been opened for a long time during business hours, this is illegal. It is possible to recognize that the act is likely to have taken place.

[3. Pachislot machine function flow]
Subsequently, the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1.

When a medal is inserted into the pachislot machine 1 by the player (bet operation is performed) and the start lever 7 is operated (start operation is performed), a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535) is used. One random number value (in the present embodiment, this may be described as an "internal lottery random number value") is extracted.

The internal lottery means (main CPU 101 that performs the internal lottery process described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed on the valid line is determined in advance. The types of symbol combinations are those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "missing". Such things are provided. The role related to the payout of medals is called a "small role", the role related to the operation of the replay (replay) is called the "replay role", and the role related to the operation of the bonus (bonus state) is called the "bonus role". Refer to. In addition, a combination that can be won internally (that is, a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established) may be simply referred to as a "role". In addition, the internal winning combination may be referred to as a "winning combination", a "predetermined result", or a "derivation allowable condition". In addition, the internal lottery means may be referred to as a "combination determining means", a "winning combination determining means", a "predetermining means", a "deriving allowable condition determining means", or the like.

Further, when the start lever 7 is operated (the start operation is performed), the plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the player operates the stop buttons (each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to the reels (each reel 3L, 3C, 3R) (stop operation is performed), the reel stop control means (described later). The main CPU101) that performs the reel stop control process controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing (or the pressing order thereof) when the stop button is pressed. The operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever-shaped one such as the start lever 7, and any operation means can be used as long as the player can perform the start operation. good. Further, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to the button-shaped ones such as the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, and any operation as long as the player can perform the stop operation. It may be a means.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". Then, in the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set for four symbols.

When the internal winning combination that allows the display of the combination of symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually has the combination of the symbols as an effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible on the top. Further, the reel stop control means uses a predetermined time to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed on the effective line. The symbol displayed when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be referred to as "stop display" or "display result". Further, displaying a symbol when the rotation of the reel is stopped is sometimes referred to as "derivation of stop display" or "derivation of display result".

Further, the reel stop control means automatically stops each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time elapses after the reels rotate, even if the player does not perform the stop operation. Stop control may be performed. In this case, the reels are stopped without the player's stop operation, so even if one of the internal winning combinations is decided, the combination of symbols related to any winning is effective. It is desirable to stop the rotation of the reel so that it is not displayed along the line.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the winning operation determination processing described later) has a combination of symbols displayed on the effective line related to the winning. (Or, other predetermined ones) is determined. That is, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols related to the winning (or other predetermined combination of symbols) is established. Then, the displayed combination of symbols is a combination of symbols related to winning (or other predetermined one) by the winning determination means (that is, a combination of symbols related to winning (or a combination of other predetermined symbols). ) Is established), a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player, or various controls are performed with that as an opportunity. In the pachislot machine 1, as an example, one game (unit game) is performed in the above series of flows.

The winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the valid line simply corresponds to any combination of symbols among a plurality of predetermined combinations of symbols. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not it corresponds to the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means. That is, in the former, it may be determined whether or not it is a combination of symbols related to winning, separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately stops and controls the stop, the prevention of the occurrence of erroneous winning can be sufficiently ensured, so that the control burden related to the detection of erroneous winning can be reduced. On the other hand, in the latter case, it is possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols related to winning is a combination of symbols for which winning is permitted, so that if an erroneous winning occurs due to a reel defect or the like, the erroneous winning is performed. Can be detected, so that security can be improved.

Further, in the pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, the display of the image by the display device (for example, the main display device 210, the sub display device 220, etc.) and the light by various lamps (for example, the upper lamp 23, etc.) , The output of sound from a speaker (for example, speakers 35a, 35b, etc.), or a combination of these is used to perform various effects. That is, these are effect execution means for executing the effect. The content of the effect executed by the effect executing means may be determined on the main control circuit 100 side (main side) or on the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side). That is, any of these can be a means for determining the content of the production.

For example, when the start lever 7 is operated (the start operation is performed), the effect random value is extracted separately from the internal lottery random value. When the random value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determining means draws the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination (or according to a predetermined determination condition). decide.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, by executing the effect content associated with the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination (combination of symbols to be aimed at, push order to be operated, etc.) can be paraphrased. The opportunity to know or anticipate is provided to the player, and the player's interest can be improved.

[4. Basic specifications for playability of pachislot machines]
Subsequently, the basic specifications regarding the playability of the pachislot machine 1 will be described.

[4-1. Design arrangement]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a specification in which a game is played by displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and a stop display. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured so that it is possible to grasp which symbol is arranged at which position on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Therefore, in the main ROM 102, at least data for identifying the type of the symbol at each symbol position of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stored. As long as such an object is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, but in the present embodiment, a symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 9) described later is used as an example thereof.

In the symbol arrangement table, symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19") indicating each symbol position in each rotation direction of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is defined. In addition, data for specifying the type of symbol (for example, symbol code) is associated with each symbol position data. Further, in the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol located in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the main display window 4 when the reel index is detected is defined as "0". The number of symbols in each row, the number of types of symbols, the maximum number of sliding pieces, and the like can be appropriately changed and specified.

[4-2. Design combination]
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, the specifications are such that the combination of the displayed symbols affects the game result. That is, the pachislot machine 1 grants various benefits according to the combination of the displayed symbols, shifts from the current state to a relatively advantageous state, or changes from the current state to a relatively disadvantageous state. It is possible to make a transition. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured so that the combination of such symbols can be grasped. Therefore, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying such a combination of symbols. As long as such an object is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, but in the present embodiment, a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 11 to 14) described later is used as an example thereof. ing.

In the symbol combination table, data indicating the types of a plurality of predetermined symbol combinations among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on the valid line (for example, "display combination" or "winning operation flag") is defined. ing. The symbols constituting each combination of symbols can be specified by using, for example, the above-mentioned symbol code or the like. In addition, data indicating the type of privilege or the like (for example, "payout or the like") is associated with each combination of symbols. Further, the symbol combination table basically has a data structure corresponding to the winning flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 17), which will be described later. The number of types of symbol combinations, the content of benefits granted, etc. can be changed and specified as appropriate.

[4-3. Internal winning role]
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, it is a specification that which combination of symbols is allowed to be displayed (whether it is determined in advance) affects the game result. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 determines the internal winning combination (that is, the type of combination of symbols that can be displayed (or the type of privilege that can be granted)) prior to the player's stop operation (in advance). It is possible. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured so as to be able to grasp such an internal winning combination. For this reason, the main ROM 102 defines data for identifying such an internal winning combination. As long as such an object is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, but in the present embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 10) described later is used as an example thereof.

In the internal lottery table, data indicating a plurality of predetermined types of internal winning combinations (for example, "No." or "winning number") and a lottery value in which each internal winning combination is determined in each gaming state are displayed. Is stipulated. The lottery value may vary depending on the set value. In addition, the types of symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed (corresponding) are associated with each internal winning combination. In the pachislot machine 1, it is possible to associate a combination of a plurality of symbols with one internal winning combination, and when such an internal winning combination is determined, which combination of symbols is displayed. Is determined by stop control.

Here, for example, in the internal lottery process described later in the present embodiment (see FIG. 26. More specifically, the internal winning combination determination process of S64), first, in the range of numerical values predetermined by the random number circuit (for example, 0). The random number values extracted from ~ 65535) are sequentially added and updated with the lottery values specified corresponding to each internal winning combination. Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result overflows). Then, in the predetermined internal winning combination, when the result of the determination exceeds 65535, the internal winning combination is won (the internal winning combination is determined). However, if none of the internal winning combinations exceeds 65535 even after making the determination, the internal winning combination in this game is "missing". It should be noted that this is just an example of the internal lottery process, and as long as an appropriate lottery is performed according to the lottery value (win probability), various methods can be adopted for the lottery process. For example, the extracted random number values are sequentially subtracted and updated with the lottery values specified for each internal winning combination, and then whether or not the subtraction result (lottery result) is less than 0 (lottery result underflows). Whether or not) may be determined to determine the internal winning combination.

As described above, in the internal lottery table, the probability of being determined (winning probability) increases as the value of the defined lottery value is larger. The winning probability of each internal winning combination can be expressed by "the lottery value specified in each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

[4-4. Stop control]
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, among the combinations of symbols permitted to be displayed by the determination of the internal winning combination, which symbol combination is finally displayed by the player's stop operation is the game result. It is a specification that affects. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 is finally displayed not only by the determined type of internal winning combination, but also by the player's stop operation timing and push order (also referred to as "stop operation mode" or "stop operation procedure"). It is possible to perform control (stop control) to change (determine) the type of symbol combination to be performed. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured so that it is possible to grasp in what mode the stop control is performed for each internal winning combination according to the stop operation mode of the player. Therefore, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying such a stop control mode. As long as such an object is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration, but in the present embodiment, a stop table, a pull-in priority table (not shown), or the like is used as an example. There is.

In the stop table, data indicating the amount of movement of the symbol (for example, "number of sliding pieces") is defined for each symbol position data of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. For example, suppose that a predetermined stop table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Next, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. At this time, it is assumed that the stop start position (the symbol position data in the middle region of the reel 3L when the stop operation is performed) is "0". Then, it is assumed that the number of sliding pieces defined in the symbol position data "0" is "4" in the predetermined stop table. Then, the main control circuit 100 controls so that the reel 3L is stopped (the scheduled stop position is "4") at the symbol position (the position of the symbol position data "4") that has been moved by four symbols. In this way, the stop table defines data (number of sliding pieces) that enables the position to be stopped to be directly determined. Note that such a data structure is just an example. Further, performing stop control using such a stop table is generally referred to as "table control".

In the pull-in priority table, when there are a plurality of symbol combinations permitted to be displayed, data indicating which symbol combination should be displayed preferentially (pull-in) (for example, "pull-in priority"). ") Is stipulated. For example, it is assumed that a predetermined attraction priority table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Here, the predetermined internal winning combination permits the display of the symbol combination A and the symbol combination B, and the predetermined attraction priority table is drawn so as to display the symbol combination B with priority over the symbol combination A. Priority shall be specified. Next, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. At this time, it is assumed that the stop start position is "0".

Then, in the main control circuit 100, for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, "4") including the stop start position, the symbol constituting the symbol combination A and the symbol constituting the symbol combination B are displayed. Search for the existence. If there are no symbols on both sides, the position to stop is determined according to a predetermined rule (for example, stop at a closer position, stop at a farther position, etc.). If there are only the symbols that make up the symbol combination A, it is decided to stop at the position corresponding to the symbol. If there are only the symbols that make up the symbol combination B, it is decided to stop at the position corresponding to the symbol. If there are both symbols, the symbol combination B is displayed with priority over the symbol combination A. Therefore, it is determined to stop at the position corresponding to the symbols constituting the symbol combination B. The pull-in priority may be stored for all symbol positions during the rotation of the target reel according to the selected pull-in priority table, or a stop operation is performed on the target reel. When it is broken, it may be stored for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces including the stop start position. Moreover, such a data structure is just an example. Further, performing stop control using such a pull-in priority table is generally referred to as "control control".

In the present embodiment, the stop control may be executed by performing only the "table control", or the stop control may be executed by performing only the "control control". Alternatively, first perform "table control" to tentatively determine the stop position, then perform "control control" to search for a more appropriate stop position, and change the stop position depending on the search result. It can also be configured to execute stop control that enables this to be performed.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, which symbol combination is finally displayed on the effective line is determined based on, for example, the following three factors.

The first element is the determined internal winning combination (the lottery result of the internal lottery process). For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "missing", the combination of symbols related to any of the replay combinations, the combination of symbols related to the small combination, or the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination is finally on the valid line. It will not be displayed. In addition, "missing" can be regarded as one of the internal winning combinations, or can be regarded as a lottery result in which the internal winning combination has not been determined.

The second element is the player's stop operation timing (the position of the symbol when the player operates any of the stop buttons (pressing position)). For example, in the present embodiment, since the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for four symbols, display is permitted even if one of the internal winning combinations is won as a result of the internal lottery processing. If the symbols that make up the combination of symbols are arranged in excess of four effective lines (or each effective line if there are multiple), the combination of the symbols depends on the stop operation timing of the player. May not be displayed. This is the so-called "missing".

The third element is the player's push order (the order in which the player operates the stop button). For example, in the present embodiment, an internal winning combination to which a combination of a plurality of symbols is associated may be determined, and in this case, it is finally displayed on the effective line according to the pushing order of the player. The combination of symbols may vary. In addition, such an internal winning combination is called a "pushing order role", and when it is a replay role, it is sometimes called a "pushing order replay", and in the case of a small role, it is called a "pushing order small role". Sometimes called.

[4-5. Game state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, various gaming states can be provided as states for playing a game in order to change the degree of advantage of the player or to achieve the intended game performance. Hereinafter, an example of the gaming state will be described.

[4-5-1. Bonus state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a bonus combination is won and a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line, it is possible to shift to the bonus state (activate the bonus state). It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such a bonus state is not provided. Further, by providing a plurality of types of bonus combinations, it is possible to configure a plurality of bonus states to be provided. When a bonus combination is won, a state (carry-over state) occurs in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line. Such a bonus role is sometimes referred to as a "carry-over role". In addition, such a carry-over state may be referred to as "between (bonus) flags" or "inside (bonus)".

In the bonus state, it is possible to change the lottery mode of the small winning combination (including the winning probability and its contents, the mode of stop control, etc., the same applies hereinafter) with respect to the state in which the bonus state is not operating (non-bonus state). (Since it is also possible to change the lottery mode of the replay combination, the bonus state can be regarded as one mode of the RT state described later). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the bonus state becomes a more advantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state. On the other hand, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state becomes a more disadvantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state.

The bonus combination includes, for example, a first-class special bonus (RB), a continuous operation device for a first-class special bonus (BB), and a second-class special bonus (CB) (however, it is not a carry-over role). , A bonus continuous operation device (MB) related to a second-class special bonus, an ordinary bonus (SB) (but not a carry-over role), and the like. Further, for example, the bonus state corresponding to each bonus combination is configured as follows. The RB state is a game state that ends when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, the upper limit is 8 times) or a predetermined number of games (for example, the upper limit is 12 times) is played. It is composed. The BB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when a predetermined number of medals to be paid out (for example, the upper limit is 285) is paid out.

The CB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game is played. The MB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when the number of medals to be paid out exceeds a predetermined arbitrary number (for example, the upper limit is 153), or when the RB or SB is won during the MB state. NS. The SB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game is played.

The operating condition of the bonus state is not limited to the fact that the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line. For example, during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (BB) related to the first-class special accessory, when the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (BB) related to the first-class special accessory starts, the first-class special role It can also be configured to automatically activate the first-class special accessory (RB) at the start of the game when the object is not in operation, or at the end of the operation of the first-class special accessory. That is, it is possible to control so that the RB is always in operation while the BB is in operation, without specifying the combination of the symbols related to the RB. Here, the RB during BB operation may be referred to as "JAC" or the like, and the specification in which the RB during BB operation automatically operates in this way may be referred to as "auto JAC" or the like. Further, during the operation of the BB, it is possible to control the operation of the RB when the combination of symbols related to the specified RB is displayed on the effective line. The specification in which the RB operates based on the display of the combination of the corresponding symbols is sometimes referred to as "manual JAC" or the like. Further, the relationship between the accessory continuous operation device (MB) related to the type 2 special accessory and the type 2 special accessory (CB) is also the same. That is, it is possible to control so that the CB is always in operation during the operation of the MB without specifying the combination of the symbols related to the CB, and during the operation of the MB, the specified symbol related to the CB can be controlled. It is also possible to control the operation of the CB when the combination is displayed on the effective line.

[4-5-2. RT state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift to the RT state (operate the RT state). It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such an RT state is not provided. It can also be configured to provide a plurality of RT states. The RT state is a state in which the lottery mode of the replay combination can be changed with respect to the state in which the RT state is not operating (non-RT state). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a more advantageous gaming state than the non-RT state. On the other hand, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a more disadvantageous gaming state than the non-RT state. Further, when a plurality of RT states are provided, the same applies to the plurality of RT states. In this case, the RT state in which the lottery mode of the replay role (particularly, the winning probability) is relatively advantageous to the player is called "high RT state" or "high probability replay state", and the lottery of the replay role is performed. An RT state in which the mode (particularly, the winning probability) is relatively disadvantageous to the player may be referred to as a "low RT state", a "low probability replay state", or the like.

The RT state can be shifted, for example, by satisfying any of the following transition conditions. Further, when a plurality of RT states are provided, the same applies to the plurality of RT states.
(1) When winning RB, BB or MB (2) When a combination of symbols related to RB, BB or MB is displayed (3) When the RB state, BB state or MB state ends (4) RB, When a specific symbol combination is displayed when the BB or MB is not won (not carried over) and is not in the RB state, BB state or MB state (5) (3) or (4) When a predetermined number of games have been played after the transition condition of

[4-5-3. AT state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift to the AT state (operate the AT state). It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such an AT state is not provided. It can also be configured to provide a plurality of AT states. The AT state is more advantageous than the state in which the AT state is not operating (non-AT state), for example, by notifying the player of information on the stop operation that is advantageous to the player when the push order combination described above is won. It is a gaming state configured as a state.

In addition, when a plurality of AT states are provided, the game period of each AT state (including the ease of extension when the period can be extended (or "additional"; the same applies hereinafter)), The degree of advantage of the player can be varied by setting the type of the notification target combination to which the information of the stop operation is notified, the probability of occurrence of the notification of the information of the stop operation, and the like being different. Further, the transition condition and the end condition of the AT state can be appropriately set according to the game playability (however, the end due to the execution of the limit process described later is excluded). Further, the AT state may be treated as if it were the above-mentioned bonus state, and in this case, it may be referred to as a "pseudo-bonus state" or the like.

Further, the game period in the AT state may be managed by the number of games (number of games) as long as the period is appropriately managed (game number management), and the predetermined number of games is set as one set and the number of sets. It may be managed by (set number management). Further, it may be managed by the number of payouts or the net increase (difference number of sheets) in the AT state (payout number management, difference number of sheets management). Further, it may be managed by the number of times (navigation number of times) of notification (for example, push order navigation at the time of winning the push order small winning combination) that affects the payout of medals in the AT state (navigation number of times management). The same applies when the AT state is extended. Further, the game period given when the AT state is extended and the game period given when the AT state is extended may be managed by a different management method. Further, when a plurality of AT states are provided, they may be managed by the same management method or may be managed by different management methods.

[4-5-4. ART state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift to an ART state that combines the above-mentioned high RT state and AT state (operate the ART state). That is, since the ART state means an AT state performed in a high RT state, at least a low RT state and a high RT state are provided as RT states, and the state is shifted to the high RT state (or to the low RT state). Although it differs from the AT state in that the control (which avoids the transition) is performed, the basic control is the same as the AT state (high RT as a result of being notified of information on the stop operation advantageous to the player). If it shifts to a state (or avoids shifting to a low RT state), it can be said to be synonymous with an AT state). When the transition condition of the ART state is satisfied, the state may be changed to the ART state by first shifting to the AT state and then to the high RT state, or at the same time in the high RT state and the AT state ( Alternatively, it may shift to the ART state by shifting to (almost simultaneously).

[4-5-5. Other game status]
In the pachislot machine 1, a gaming state other than the above-mentioned various gaming states can be provided. For example, each mode in the advantageous section described later (see FIGS. 5 and 6) is also a state in which the player plays a game, and it is advantageous whether or not to shift to the AT state as a pseudo-bonus state. Since the degree can be varied, these can be regarded as a gaming state. Further, from the same viewpoint, for example, it is possible to provide a gaming state in which the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to the bonus state can be changed. For example, when the bonus combination is won (carried over), the game state in which the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is easily displayed by the stop control and the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination are relative to each other. It is also possible to configure the player so that the degree of advantage can be changed by providing a gaming state that is difficult to be displayed on. Further, for example, a gaming state in which the bonus combination wins (easily wins) with a predetermined probability and a gaming state in which the bonus combination wins (relatively difficult to win) with a probability lower than the predetermined probability are provided. Therefore, it can be configured so that the degree of advantage of the player can be changed.

In addition, the following method is adopted as a method that can change the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to the AT state (including whether or not to extend the game period of the AT state in the AT state. The same applies hereinafter). You can also do it. For example, a "specific role" can be determined as an internal winning combination. The number of medals awarded to the specific combination varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (stop operation timing, push order, or a combination thereof). (For example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct answer), 8 cards are paid out, and if it is inappropriate (incorrect answer), 1 card is paid out or not paid out).

Then, if the specific combination is won in a specific game state, and if eight cards are paid out, whether or not to change the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to the AT state in this game to an advantageous one. (It may also include a decision as to whether or not to directly shift to the AT state or whether or not to directly extend the game period in the AT state. Hereinafter, it will be described as an "advantageous decision"). On the other hand, if eight cards are not paid out, the advantageous decision is made in this game. Alternatively, if the specific combination is won in the above-mentioned specific game state, and if eight cards are paid out, the advantageous decision is made in this game. On the other hand, if eight cards are not paid out, the advantageous decision will not be made in this game.

In this way, when the player plays a game by a specific game method, the advantageous decision is made in the current game as a result of the game, and the advantageous decision is not made (the advantage decision is limited to be made). It can also be configured to be) in some cases. In addition, the player may change between this game and the next game, and if such restrictions continue after the next game, the (next) player may suffer a significant disadvantage. Therefore, it is desirable that such restrictions be limited to this game and not continue after the next game. Also, such restrictions are sometimes referred to as "penalties".

[4-6. Game section]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to prevent the gambling property from becoming excessively high, it is possible to provide various game sections as a state in which the game is performed with a concept different from the above-mentioned game state. Hereinafter, an example of the game section will be described. The game section is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section.

(Non-advantageous section)
The non-advantageous section is configured as a game period in which it is not possible to notify the player of the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. The following requirements are just examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, it can be changed as appropriate.

(1) It is not possible to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode (for example, push order navigation). Therefore, it is not possible to control the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.
(2) When the set value is changed (setting change), or when the initialization condition such as "RAM error" described later is satisfied, the non-advantageous section is set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit processing described later is executed in the advantageous section (that is, a predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter described later). When the value) becomes a specified value (for example, 1500 games or 2400 sheets), a non-advantageous section is set as an initial state. It should be noted that the non-advantageous section may be set on the condition that the predetermined value is referred to and the predetermined value is a specific update value even before the predetermined value becomes the specified value. In addition, when a predetermined end condition is satisfied during the advantageous section and the end is determined (for example, when the advantageous section end lottery is configured to be performed and the winning is won, etc.), that is the condition. A non-advantageous section may be set.
(4) In the non-advantageous section, the processing related to the advantageous section (for example, the processing for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section) can be derived only by referring to the determined internal winning combination. It is not possible to perform processing that refers to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the non-advantageous section (or the advantageous section before the transition). It should be noted that which internal winning combination is determined can be determined by directly referring to the data indicating the internal winning combination such as the winning number, or the sub-flags (plurality of combinations) generated or converted from the data of the internal winning combination. It is also possible to refer to the data indicating the internal winning combination indirectly, such as (the data in which is used as one determination target data).
(5) The non-advantageous section is basically one state, and a plurality of states cannot be set within the non-advantageous section. For example, the non-advantageous section after the end of the advantageous section cannot be set as the non-advantageous section A, the non-advantageous section after the setting change cannot be set as the non-advantageous section B, and so on.

(Advantageous section)
The advantageous section is configured as a game period in which it is possible to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and has the following requirements. The following requirements are just examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, it can be changed as appropriate.

(1) It is possible to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode (for example, push order navigation). Therefore, it is possible to control to the above-mentioned AT state and ART state.
(2) When the set value is changed (setting change), or when the initialization condition such as "RAM error" described later is satisfied, the advantageous section cannot be set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit processing described later is executed in the advantageous section, it is necessary to end the advantageous section.
(4) In the advantageous section, the processing related to the advantageous section (for example, the processing for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state (mode) during the advantageous section, or whether or not to extend a specific gaming state (mode), etc.) is performed. , Not only the processing referring to the determined internal winning combination, but also the processing referring to various parameters other than the internal winning combination such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the advantageous section can be performed. .. As another example of various parameters that can be referred to, for example, privilege information such as points that can be given according to the above-mentioned various parameters, a type of bonus state, a type of RT state, and a stop operation timing of any of the reels. , Or the push order and the like.
(5) Multiple states can be set within the advantageous section. For example, it is possible to set a state such as a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a CZ state that easily shifts to the AT state, or an AT state in which the expected value of medal increase becomes positive when the stop operation is performed according to the notification. Further, for example, in response to the determination of the transition to the CZ state in the normal state, the CZ precursor is set as a standby state until the transition to the CZ state is actually performed, and a precursor effect suggesting the transition to the CZ state can be performed. Depending on whether the AT state transition is determined in the state, the normal state, or the CZ state, it is set as a standby state until the actual transition to the AT state, and a precursor effect suggesting the transition to the AT state can be performed. A state such as an AT precursor state can also be set according to the playability.
(6) By lighting the section lamp (status display unit) that can notify which section is the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section, it is possible to notify that the section is in the advantageous section (the section lamp is off). If so, it can be notified that the section is in a non-advantageous section). As described above, the lighting start timing of the section lamp can be set to any timing to some extent. Basically, the lighting may be started when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section and may be continued until the non-advantageous section shifts, or the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section (the advantageous section starts). However, if the transitioned advantageous section is in the normal state, the lighting may not be started, and the lighting may be started from the time when the AT state is first reached. If the shifted advantageous section is in the AT state, lighting may be started from that time.

[4-7. limiter]
In the pachislot machine 1, in order to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high due to the advantageous section continuing for too long, an upper limit (limit) is set for the period in which the advantageous section continues continuously. Is possible. Such an upper limit is called a "limiter". Further, in the present embodiment, ending the advantageous section by such a limiter is described as execution of limit processing or operation of the limiter. An example of the limiter will be described below.

(Game number limiter)
The game number limiter is configured as a limiter in which limit processing is executed when the number of games (number of games) in the advantageous section reaches "1500" times. For example, the advantageous section game number counter, which will be described later, starts counting from the time when the advantageous section is started, and adds one count each time one game is digested. Then, based on the value of the advantageous section game number counter becoming a specified value (for example, "1500" or more) (for example, even when the game period in the AT state remains), the advantageous section is forcibly set. End and shift to a non-advantageous section. The number of games in which the number of games limiter operates can be set to any number as long as the number of games is "1500" or less, which is the upper limit. In addition, if the requirements for such a number of games limiter are relaxed or tightened, they can be changed as appropriate. Further, the gambling property may be suppressed stepwise according to the number of games in the advantageous section.

(Payout number limiter)
The payout number limiter is configured as a limiter in which limit processing is executed when the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section reaches "2400". For example, the advantageous section payout counter, which will be described later, starts counting from the start of the advantageous section, and each time a medal is paid out, the corresponding number of medals (more specifically, the net increase obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts). (Several minutes) Add the count. Then, based on the value of the advantageous section payout counter becoming a specified value (for example, "2400" or more) (for example, even when the game period in the AT state remains), the advantageous section is forcibly set. End and shift to a non-advantageous section. The number of payouts for which the payout limiter operates can be set to any number as long as the number of payouts is "2400" or less, which is the upper limit. In addition, if the requirements for such payout limiters are relaxed or tightened, they can be changed as appropriate. Further, the gambling may be suppressed stepwise according to the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section.

Further, for example, the advantageous section payout counter, which will be described later, counts the plus amount from the latest lowest point, with the point where the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section as the lowest point (starting point). (That is, if there is no payout, the count is subtracted, etc.). That is, the payout number limiter executes the limit process when a maximum of "2400" medals are paid out from the time when the number of medals increases in the advantageous section (for example, when the AT state is started). It can also be configured as a limiter to be used. Further, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter described later may simply count the actual payout number (that is, the number of bets not subtracted from the payout number) instead of the net increase number described above.

The pachislot machine 1 may execute the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of games limiter, or may execute the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of payout limiters, and may execute the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of games limiter and the payout number limiter. The limit processing of the advantageous section may be executed by using both of the number limiters. When both limiters are used, it is desirable to end the advantageous section when the operating conditions of either limiter are satisfied after the advantageous section starts.

Further, the type of limiter is not limited to the above-mentioned game number limiter and payout number limiter. For example, the number of times the push order small winning combination is navigated in the AT state (that is, the number of times that information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified about the winning combination related to the payout of medals) is a predetermined number of times (for example, "400" times). It is also possible to provide a navigation number limiter in which limit processing is executed when the limit processing is performed. That is, as long as the gambling property can be appropriately suppressed, it is possible to execute the limit processing using various conditions related to the game.

[4-8. External signal]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 has a specification capable of outputting a plurality of types of external signals to the outside. For example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the bonus state and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the bonus state, the external data display can also be used. It is possible to perform an effect during the linked bonus state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the BB state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the BB state, and the MB state is started. If the external signal 2 is turned on and the external signal 2 is turned off based on the end of the MB state, the external data display not only performs the above-mentioned effect during the bonus state, but also gives a bonus. The number of times can be counted by the type.

Further, for example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the AT state and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the AT state, the external data display can also be used. In conjunction with this, it is possible to perform an effect during the AT state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the predetermined AT state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the predetermined AT state, and the specific AT state is set. If the external signal 2 is turned on based on the start and the external signal 2 is turned off based on the end of the specific AT state, the external data display is also in the above-mentioned AT state. Not only can the effect be performed, but the number of ATs can be counted for each type.

Further, for example, the AT state is configured as the AT state for managing the number of sets, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the AT state of the first first set, and the set is started for the second and subsequent sets. If the external signal 2 is turned on each time, the number of initial hits in the AT state and the number of extensions in the AT state can be counted even on the external data display. The timing of turning on and the timing of turning off each external signal can be set as appropriate. That is, as long as the situation is appropriately recognized by an external data display, a hall computer, or the like, the output mode of each external signal can be appropriately set. For example, various conditions can be adopted for the period from the off state to the on state and then to the off state again, such as a predetermined time, one game, and until the state changes.

[4-9. command]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a specification that allows a plurality of types of commands to be transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200 cannot communicate with each other, and it is a requirement that the main control circuit 100 communicates only in one direction of the sub control circuit 200. ing. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to timely transmit information (command) for notifying the change of the state in the pachislot machine 1 to the sub control circuit 200. An example of such a command will be described below.

The main control circuit 100 transmits an initialization command to the sub control circuit 200, for example, when a setting change operation is performed. The initialization command is configured to include parameters that specify setting values, game states, and the like. Further, for example, when a betting operation is performed, a medal insertion command is transmitted. The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of bets and the like. Also, for example, when a start operation is performed, a start command is transmitted. The start command is configured to include parameters for specifying the internal winning combination, the game state, and the like. Further, for example, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command is transmitted. The lock command is configured to include parameters that specify the content of the lock effect and the like. Further, for example, when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts, a reel rotation start command is transmitted. The reel rotation start command is configured to include parameters that specify that the reel rotation has started and the like.

Further, for example, when a stop operation is performed, a reel stop command is transmitted. The reel stop command is configured to include parameters for specifying the reel to be stopped, the position where the reel is stopped, and the like. Further, for example, when all the reels are stopped and the display combination (winning operation flag) is confirmed, the winning operation command is transmitted. The winning operation command is configured to include parameters that specify the type of display combination, the content of the privilege to be given, and the like. Further, for example, when starting an advantageous section, an advantageous section start command is transmitted. The advantageous section start command is configured to include parameters for specifying the advantageous section start, the mode (game state), and the like. Further, for example, when the advantageous section is ended, the advantageous section end command is transmitted. The advantageous section end command is configured to include parameters for specifying the end of the advantageous section and the factors for ending the advantageous section. Further, for example, when a settlement operation is performed, a settlement command is transmitted. The settlement command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of returns and the like. Note that these are just examples, and commands other than these can be sent as needed, and unnecessary commands can be prevented from being sent.

[4-10. Direction]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, various effects are executed by using various effect devices in order to enhance the interest of the game, to inform the player of useful information, or to achieve the intended playability. It is possible. Hereinafter, an example of such an effect will be described.

[4-10-1. Main side production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the following effects can be performed by controlling the main control circuit 100 side (main side). As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, it is possible to notify the information of the stop operation by the instruction monitor, which is also included in the production in a broad sense.

(Rock production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the progress of the game can be stopped for a predetermined period (the player's game operation is invalidated for a predetermined period). Such an effect is referred to as a "rock effect (or simply" rock ")", as well as a "freeze effect (or simply" freeze ")" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such a lock effect is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of lock effects can be performed.

Further, the game operation to be invalidated may be, for example, a start operation, a stop operation, or another operation. For example, when the start operation is invalidated for a predetermined period, the progress of the game is stopped in a predetermined period after all the stop operations are performed. Further, for example, when the stop operation is invalidated for a predetermined period, the progress of the game is stopped in a predetermined period after the start operation is performed. In addition, when a plurality of types of lock effects are provided, the period during which the progress of the game is stopped (the period during which the player's game operation is invalidated), the type of game operation to be invalidated, etc. are set for each lock effect. You can do it.

(Reel production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the effect display mode (not only the variable display mode but also the stop display mode) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R during the execution of the lock effect described above is combined with the stop display mode. (Including) can be produced. Such an effect is referred to as a "reel effect" as well as a "design effect" or the like. It should be noted that it can be configured so that such a reel effect is not performed, or it can be configured so that a plurality of types of reel effects can be performed. In addition, the case of "performing (executing) the lock effect" includes both the case where the reel effect is performed and the case where the reel effect is not performed.

In short, the reel effect is to rotate or stop (temporarily stop) each reel 3L, 3C, 3R regardless of the player's game operation during the period when the player's game operation is invalidated. It is to produce with. Therefore, it is possible to set an operation pattern for performing such an effect operation without considering the rotation speed, the maximum number of sliding pieces, and the like. Further, if a plurality of operation patterns are set, a plurality of types of reel effects can be provided. Further, a wider range of effect patterns can be set by combining a plurality of types of reel effects and a plurality of types of lock effects. It should be noted that only any one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be used for the reel effect, any two may be used, or all three may be used.

(Pseudo game)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform an effect of performing a pseudo game during the execution of the above-mentioned lock effect. Such an effect is called a "pseudo game". It should be noted that it can be configured so that such a pseudo game is not performed, or it can be configured so that a plurality of types of pseudo games can be performed. In addition, the case of "performing (executing) the lock effect" includes both the case where the pseudo game is performed and the case where the pseudo game is not performed.

In short, the pseudo game receives the player's game operation in a pseudo manner during the period in which the player's game operation is invalidated, thereby rotating or stopping (temporarily stopping) each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The production is done by doing something like that. That is, the above-mentioned reel effect is further produced by interposing the game operation of the player. For example, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1-bet button 6b, the start lever 7, each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement button 9, etc. are basically provided for the purpose of being used for game operation. For this reason, it is essentially undesirable to be used for any other purpose. However, in the simulated game, it is possible to accept these operations on the premise that measures are taken so that the player does not misunderstand that the game is actually being played.

Here, the flow of the pseudo game will be described with an example. The pseudo game is performed, for example, in the following flow.
(1) The player's actual start operation (the execution condition is satisfied here and the pseudo game starts)
(2) Each reel rotates in a pseudo manner (during a pseudo game)
(3) Pseudo stop operation is accepted, and each reel is temporarily stopped by this (during pseudo game).
(4) Each reel actually starts rotating after undergoing random delay processing (pseudo game ends and actual game starts)

The random delay process is, for example, a state in which specific symbols are displayed side by side in the above-mentioned situation (3), and when each reel starts normal rotation in the above-mentioned situation (4) as it is, the player However, it may be easier to stop the operation using a specific symbol as a mark (it becomes an aid to so-called "pressing"), so in order to correct this, a delay period is randomly set for each reel. It is a process for starting rotation after it is generated (such a delay period is also referred to as a "relocation period"). Further, when each reel is temporarily stopped in the above-mentioned situations (3) and (4), the phase signal in the excitation control of each stepping motor is always predetermined so as not to be mistaken as being completely stopped. It is desirable to alternate the reels in the forward and reverse directions for less than an hour (eg, 500 ms).

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, when an arbitrary combination of symbols is temporarily stopped in the situation (3) described above (when the third reel is temporarily stopped and all the reels are temporarily stopped), In the situation (4) described above, each reel may be slightly vibrated (swinged) up and down until the random delay processing is started. As long as the phase signal changes within the above-mentioned predetermined time, such fluctuation does not occur when the first reel temporarily stops and when the second reel temporarily stops. It may be.

Further, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-game lamp for notifying that the pseudo-game is in progress is provided, and after the pseudo-game is started in the above-mentioned situation (1), the above-mentioned (4) is performed. ), The pseudo-game lamp may be turned on until the random delay processing is started. It is desirable that the pseudo-game lamp is installed above the operation unit that receives the game operation of the player and at a position that can be visually recognized during the game. Further, the pseudo-game lamp is an independent lamp that is not used for other purposes, and it is desirable that the entire display portion of the pseudo-game lamp is covered with a monochromatic edge. Further, it is desirable that the pseudo-game lamp has a constant surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm and the surface area exceeds 642 square mm) including the explanatory portion of the pseudo-game lamp. Further, the description portion of the pseudo-game lamp is a description that can be recognized as a lamp for notifying that the pseudo-game lamp is in the pseudo-game (for example, "FREEPLAY", "during the pseudo-game production", or ". It is desirable that the description such as "during automatic reel production"), and it is desirable that such a description portion occupies 1/3 or more of the surface area. The pseudo game lamp may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or the sub control circuit 200.

Further, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-game in-game display for notifying that the pseudo-game is in progress is displayed, after the pseudo-game is started in the above-mentioned situation (1), the above-mentioned (4). ), The main display device 210 and / or the sub display device 220 (or both) may be used until the random delay processing is started. It is desirable that the pseudo-game display is displayed above the operation unit that receives the player's game operation and at a position that can be visually recognized during the game (in the present embodiment, the main display device 210 and the sub display device). Since all of the 220s are above the operation unit, any of the 220s may be used). Further, in the pseudo-game display, the display range including the explanation portion has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm, and when the display screen is less than 7 inches, the surface area exceeds 642 square mm. , When the display screen is 7 inches or more, the surface area is 8.2% or more of the entire screen, etc.). In addition, the explanation portion of the pseudo-game display is a description that can be recognized as a display for notifying that the pseudo-game display is in the pseudo-game (for example, "FREEPLAY", "pseudo-game effect", etc. Alternatively, it is desirable that the description is "during automatic reel production" or the like), and it is desirable that the size is such that the player can read it without being concealed.

Further, for example, during the pseudo game (for example, from the start of the pseudo game in the situation (1) described above to the start of the random delay process in the situation (4) described above), the instruction monitor is displayed. It is desirable to configure so that the stop operation information is not notified (when it is necessary to display the stop operation information on the instruction monitor in the game, the display is started at the timing when the random delay processing is started). In this way, it is possible to further prevent the player from misunderstanding that the game is actually being played during the simulated game. If any of the above measures are taken, the stop operation information may be notified to the sub-side effect device (for example, the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220) during the simulated game. good. Similarly, during the pseudo-game, the effect device on the sub side may perform an effect (linked to the pseudo-game operation) according to the game result of the pseudo-game.

Further, in the actual game, the game operation of the player or the test signal corresponding to the state in which the game operation is possible is output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine, but during the pseudo game. Does not output a test signal corresponding to the player's pseudo-game operation or the state in which the pseudo-game operation is possible. Therefore, during the simulated game, a test signal (pseudo-game signal) may be output so that the testing machine can recognize that the simulated game is in progress. When the first interface board 301 for the testing machine receives the pseudo game signal from the main control board 71, the first interface board 301 outputs the signal for the pseudo game progress control to the main control board 71, so that the first interface board 301 is simulated on the main control board 71 side. The game may be advanced (that is, the first interface board 301 for the testing machine may be provided with a pseudo game progress function). Further, when the first interface board 301 for the testing machine is provided with such a pseudo game progress function, a changeover switch capable of switching on / off of the function may be provided. As a result, in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot machine 1, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to confirm the effect content of the pseudo game.

[4-10-2. Sub side production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the following effects can be performed by controlling the sub-control circuit 200 side (sub-side). As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, it is possible to notify the stop operation information by the main display device 210 or the like, which is also included in the production in a broad sense.

(Normal production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform an effect that is completed in this game (that is, it ends in one game). Such an effect is referred to as a "normal effect" as well as a "single effect" or the like. It should be noted that it can be configured so that such a normal effect is not performed, or it can be configured so that a plurality of types of normal effects can be performed.

(Continuous production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform a continuous effect (that is, to continue for a plurality of games) over a plurality of games. Such an effect is referred to as a "continuous reading effect" as well as a "continuous effect" or the like. It should be noted that it can be configured so that such a continuous effect is not performed, or it can be configured so that a plurality of types of continuous effects can be performed.

(Operation interlocking production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform an effect capable of changing the effect content according to the effect operation of the player. Such an effect is referred to as an "operation-linked effect" and also called a "button effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure it so that such an operation-linked effect is not performed, or it is possible to configure it so that a plurality of types of operation-linked effects can be performed. Further, the operation-linked effect can be configured as a normal effect or a continuous effect. Further, the effect operation can include not only the operation for the effect button group but also various game operations.

The above-mentioned various effects can be used for various purposes. For example, it can be used to suggest or notify a set value, an internal winning combination, a game state, a game section, a privilege grant content, a period until the privilege is granted, and the like. In addition, it can be used to suggest or notify the degree of advantage. Moreover, these uses are just examples.

(Other production)
In the pachislot machine 1, it is possible to perform an effect other than the above-mentioned various effects. For example, various notifications to the player or the game store (for example, immersive prevention notification, lost property prevention notification, error status notification, demo status notification, etc.) are also included in the production in a broad sense as those used for purposes other than the above. .. In addition, the immersive prevention notification may be, for example, a warning or the like indicating that when the advantageous section ends. Further, the forgotten item prevention notification may be, for example, a warning or the like indicating that when the advantageous section ends or the settlement operation is performed. Further, in the error status notification, a warning or the like indicating to that effect can be notified from the time when the error occurs until the error is resolved. In addition, the demo status notification can be notified that the table is vacant or the like when the period during which the game is not played reaches a predetermined period or when the settlement operation is performed.

[5. First game machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 22, a specific example of the specifications relating to the playability of the pachislot machine 1 will be described as a “first game machine”. It should be noted that some or all of the various specifications and functions described as the first gaming machine in the present embodiment can be applied to those described as other gaming machines in the present embodiment. With respect to various specifications, functions, and the like described as other gaming machines in the present embodiment, some or all of them can be applied to those described as the first gaming machine in the present embodiment. That is, an invention in which these are appropriately combined can be used as the invention according to the present embodiment.

First, in the first gaming machine, the effective line is defined as only one line of the above-mentioned "center line". Further, in the first gaming machine, a non-bonus state and a bonus state are provided as the gaming state. In addition, the non-bonus state is between the 2BB flags in which the later-described "F_2BB" (a bonus combination that can be won only in the two-card bet state. Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "2BB") is carried over, and later. "F_3BB" (a bonus combination that can be won only in the state of 3 bets. Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "3BB") is carried over between the 3BB flags, and neither bonus combination is won (carried over). It is configured to include between non-flags (not). Further, the bonus state is configured to include a 2BB state that shifts according to the display of the symbol combination related to 2BB and a 3BB state that shifts according to the display of the symbol combination related to 3BB. NS.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to play a game in a state where two medals are bet (two-card bet state) and a state where three medals are bet (three-card bet state). There is. The "bet" means that the player inserts two or three medals into the medal slot 5 in order to use the game, and the player operates the MAX bet button 6a or the 1-bet button 6b. This includes both multiplying two or three medals from the credits, and automatically multiplying two or three medals by winning the replay role.

[5-1. Playability of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, the flow of the game in the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. Note that FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a transition flow of a gaming state in a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section in the first gaming machine, and FIG. 6 is for explaining an example of each mode in the first gaming machine. 7 and 8 are diagrams showing an example of various tables in the first gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the first gaming machine, the state in which the player plays a game is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section is further divided into an effect section (advantageous section / normal game) and an advantageous section. An increase section (advantageous section / pseudo bonus) is provided. The non-advantageous section is a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state disadvantageous to the player. The production section is a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state disadvantageous to the player, which is the same as the non-advantageous section. , It differs from the non-advantageous section in that the mode transition is performed.

That is, the non-advantageous section is defined as an initial state that is controlled when the game in the advantageous section is completed, when the setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are satisfied, or when the product is shipped from the factory. The effect section is a control state as a normal state in which the expected degree of increase section transition (granting) can be changed by mode transition or the like, and the player plays a normal game.

On the other hand, the increasing section is a gaming state (AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and is a gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, the increase section is a control state as an advantageous state in which the player can increase the medals. Both the production section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and are configured as a series of advantageous sections by shifting these sections to each other.

In the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7A, the non-advantageous section sub-flag as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later) in the non-advantageous section. Is determined. It should be noted that the sub-flag plays an internal winning combination that plays a similar role (whether or not it is a lottery target combination, its winning probability, etc.) in various lottery (various processes related to the advantageous section) related to playability by the main control circuit 100. It is information for making the group identifiable by grouping and assigning the same information. As a result, it is not necessary to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination, so that the amount of data can be compressed and the capacity of the main ROM 102 can be avoided. In the non-advantageous section, a lottery using this non-advantageous section sub-flag is performed.

The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Ripbell" has internal winning roles of "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), and "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2". "(No." 10 "to No." 33 "). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "weak che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_cherry" (No. "5"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "watermelon" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "fixed combination" is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_fixed cherry" (No. "6") or "F_reach" (No. "8"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Middle Che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7"). It should be noted that the non-advantageous section can also be configured so that the winning sub-flag and the winning sub-flag can be determined as in the advantageous section. Further, these correspondences are not limited to those described above.

Further, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7A, in the advantageous section, the advantageous section winning sub-flag as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later). Is determined. Further, in the advantageous section, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the combination of the displayed symbols is determined. In the advantageous section, a lottery is performed using these advantageous section winning sub-flags and advantageous section winning sub-flags.

The sub-flag "bell" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is any one of "F_bell 123A1" to "F_bell 321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). The sub-flag "weak che" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_cherry" (No. "5"). The sub-flag "watermelon" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"). The sub-flag "fixed combination" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_fixed cherry" (No. "6") or "F_reach eye" (No. "8"). .. The sub-flag "middle che" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_middle cherry" (No. "7").

The sub-flag "Tsu Lip 1" at the time of winning the advantageous section is "Right" when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4"). It is determined when the combination of the symbols of "rising rip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "rising rip to the right"). The sub-flag "Through Lip 2" at the time of winning the advantageous section is "parallel" when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4"). It is determined when the combination of the symbols of "rip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "parallel lip").

Here, in the first gaming machine, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_replay A" (No. "3"), the combination of the symbols of "right-up lip" is between the 3BB flags. It is displayed, and a combination of "parallel lip" symbols is displayed between the 2BB flags and between the non-flags.

That is, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "Through Lip 1" is determined as a sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section between the 3BB flags, which is advantageous between the 2BB flags and the non-flags. "Through Lip 2" is determined as a sub-flag when winning a section. Then, in the first gaming machine, when the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section are different in this way, various lottery described later (for example, a pseudo-bonus transition lottery using the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. The degree of advantage in the mode transition lottery using the mode transition lottery table shown in 8 (f) is varied.

In the first gaming machine, for example, "F_replay A" (No. "3") serves as a role in which the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section changes depending on whether it is between the 3BB flags or between the 2BB flags. ) Is given as an example, but the mode in which the sub-flag changes when winning an advantageous section is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_bell 123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control is different depending on whether it is between the 3BB flags and the 2BB flags. Therefore, if you win such a role, the number of medals paid out will not be changed (or may be changed), and the combination of displayed symbols will be different. The sub-flag may be determined. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"), the pressing position (stop operation timing) regardless of which flag is between (non-flag). ) Is appropriate, the combination of "watermelon" symbols is displayed, and if the pressing position is not appropriate, a dropout occurs and the combination of "watermelon spills" symbols is displayed. When the winning combination is won, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, which is different depending on whether the winning is possible without the omission occurring or the omission occurs, may be determined. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), the stop operation is a specific mode between the 3BB flags (in this specific mode, for example, the stop operation is defined in advance. If it is performed in the batting order (correct answer pressing order), the pressing position (timing of the stop operation) is appropriate, or a combination of these, any aspect may be used). The combination of "parallel rip" symbols is displayed, and if it is not performed in a specific mode, the combination of "right-up rip" symbols is displayed, which determines a different advantageous section winning sub-flag. You may do so. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

That is, in the first gaming machine, it is possible that the final stop display mode may differ depending on the number of bets, the game state, the mode of the stop operation, or any combination of these, with respect to the specific combination. It is possible to apply all modes in which different secondary information can be determined according to different stop display modes, thereby varying the degree of advantage.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of the first gaming machine. In the non-advantageous section, a lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is performed for each game. Specifically, the advantageous section transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7B is referred to, the internal winning combination is determined, and the non-advantageous section sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination. At a predetermined timing, the transition destination mode and the like are determined according to the non-game section sub-flag. In this determination, when only the type of the mode when shifting to the advantageous section is determined (“start of advantageous section” in FIG. 5), not only the type of the mode but also the pseudo bonus may be shifted. There is a case where it is decided (in FIG. 5, "advantageous section start + pseudo bonus start"). However, in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to make the specifications so that it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus.

Here, each mode in the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the first gaming machine, the mode is control information (which may be rephrased as a gaming state or a control state) for changing the degree of expectation of an increase section (pseudo-bonus) transition (grant) in the production section (normal game). Yes, in the production section (normal game), the presence or absence of a pseudo bonus transition is determined according to this mode, the advantageous section is maintained, or the advantageous section is terminated and the transition to the non-advantageous section is determined. It is designed to do.

The start mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (directing section), and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see the figure below). 7 (c)), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8 described later). Although not shown, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games" in the start mode. The number of ceiling games is used to forcibly shift to the pseudo-bonus when the period during which the pseudo-bonus does not shift becomes a certain period. Therefore, the smaller the number of ceiling games, the more advantageous to the player, and the larger the number of ceiling games, the more disadvantageous to the player.

Normally, the A mode is the mode in which the player is most likely to stay and is relatively disadvantageous in playing the game, and the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively low ((c) in FIG. 7 described later). (See), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later). In the normal A mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games". Further, in FIG. 6, "about 999G after the pseudo-bonus" means that after the end of the pseudo-bonus, the mode shifts to the end A mode or the end B mode, which will be described later, and 32 games without shifting to the pseudo-bonus in the mode. If this normal A mode is selected when the game is played and once transitions to the non-advantageous section and then transitions from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, the apparent number of ceiling games is "965 games" + end A. This is expressed because it is the game period "32 games" in the mode or the end B mode + the number of games required to shift from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. Hereinafter, the same applies to the normal B mode, the heaven preparation mode, and the chance mode.

Normally, B mode is a mode that is relatively easy for the player to stay in playing a game and is relatively disadvantageous, but it is a mode that is more advantageous than normal A mode, and the degree of expectation to shift to a pseudo bonus is high. It is relatively low (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8 described later). In the normal B mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games".

In the heaven preparation mode, the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), but the number of ceiling games is set to "466 games", and when shifting to the pseudo bonus. After that, it is confirmed that the mode will shift to the heaven mode (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later), so that the mode is relatively advantageous in that sense.

In the chance mode, the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), and the number of ceiling games is set to "222 games", which is relatively advantageous in that sense. Mode. However, the expectation for shifting to the heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later).

End A mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay if you do not shift to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after the transition to the pseudo bonus, and you expect to shift to the pseudo bonus. The degree is the lowest (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8 described later). In the end A mode, if 32 games are played without shifting to the pseudo-bonus after the end of the pseudo-bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section.

The end B mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode, but it is more advantageous than the end A mode because it is easy to stay when the pseudo bonus is changed and the heaven mode (including the heaven preparation mode) is not changed after the end. Since it is a mode, the expectation of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see the figure described later). 8 (f)). In the end B mode, as in the end A mode, when the game of 32 games is performed without shifting to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section. The end A mode and the end B mode can also be collectively referred to as the "end mode".

The guarantee mode is a mode in which the player stays when the heaven C mode ends, and the expectation for shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), and the number of ceiling games is "32 games". Since it is set to, it is a relatively advantageous mode in that sense. However, the expectation for shifting to the heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later). That is, when the heaven C mode ends, it is positioned as a mode for maintaining (guaranteeing) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time in order to prevent a decrease in interest due to it.

Heaven A mode may also include extending (adding) the pseudo-bonus (in the case of a specification in which the AT state is continued by making a decision to extend (add) during the AT state). It is a mode in which the same can be expected (the same applies hereinafter), the probability of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), the number of ceiling games is set to "32 games", and the ceiling is also expected. It is a relatively advantageous mode in which the probability that the mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to a medium level. Although not shown in FIG. 6, for example, a setting difference may be provided for the ceiling mode loop rate. For example, when the set value is an odd number (1,3,5), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 75%, and when the set value is an even number (2,4,6), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 67%. The lottery value can be set so that, or simply, the higher the set value, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate. The same applies to the heaven B mode and the heaven C mode, which will be described later, and a setting difference can be provided for the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which you can expect a series of pseudo-bonus games, and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Fig. 7 below), and the number of ceiling games is "32 games." , And the probability that the ceiling mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set high, which is a relatively advantageous mode. That is, it is a mode that is even more advantageous than the heaven A mode in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which you can expect a series of pseudo-bonus games, and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Fig. 7 below), and the number of ceiling games is "32 games." , And the probability that the ceiling mode will be maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to be fairly high, which is a relatively advantageous mode. That is, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, the mode is more advantageous than the heaven A mode and the heaven B mode. Heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode can be collectively referred to as "heaven mode".

It should be noted that each of the above modes is merely an example, and the mode configuration is not limited to this. It is possible to set a mode other than each of the above-mentioned modes, or it is possible not to set a part of each of the above-mentioned modes.

Further, up to this point, the non-advantageous section has been described as having a relatively lower advantage than the advantageous section, but the relationship between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the non-advantageous section, the transition rate to the increasing section is higher or the average number of games required to shift to the increasing section is shorter than when at least one or more modes are set in the advantageous section. It is also possible to make specifications such as squeezing, or specifications that make it easier for non-advantageous sections to be the most increasing sections. By doing so, an incentive to play the game is created even in a state where it is confirmed that the section is not advantageous, such as after the setting is changed, so that it is a motivation to start the game even when the store is opened. In addition, even if the section lamp is turned off when 32 games have passed since the end of the pseudo-bonus, it is not determined that the state will be the most disadvantageous, so that the motivation for continuing the game even in such a case. It becomes. Further, up to this point, the effect section has been described as being in a gaming state in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, but a disadvantageous mode as compared with the increase section (for example, the frequency of notification is reduced or the target of notification is targeted. If it is (such as changing the winning combination), it is possible to set the game state in which the information of the stop operation is notified.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of the first gaming machine. In the production section (normal game), first, for each game, a pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Specifically, during the game after the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (c) is referred to, the internal winning combination is determined, and the advantageous section winning sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination. At a predetermined timing of, it is determined whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In addition, in (c) of FIG. 7, "non-winning" means not shifting to the pseudo-bonus, and "winning (this time game)" means shifting from this game to the pseudo-bonus. "Winning (next game)" means shifting from the next game to a pseudo bonus.

In the first gaming machine, if the "winning (current game)" is determined, the game is started at the start of the current game, and if the "winning (next game)" is determined, the game is started at the start of the next game. After the operation (stop operation) is invalidated for a certain period of time and the reel effect ("red 7 aligned" effect) in which the "red 7" symbols are displayed in the main display window 4 is performed during the invalid period. , When it is necessary to notify the information of the stop operation in the game in which the pseudo-bonus is started and the "red 7 alignment" effect is performed, at least the invalid period ends and the game operation (stop operation) is effective. (Although it may be before that, when the timing is not before the start of the above-mentioned random delay processing), the information of the stop operation is notified.

In the production section (normal game), if it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. The transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo-bonus, or may be a mode after the end of the pseudo-bonus. In addition, as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus, and when the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery described later will be performed. (At the time of winning) and mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) will not be held.

In the production section (normal game), if it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), for each game (more specifically, "F_replay A" or "F_replay") In the game that wins "B"), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Specifically, during the game (next time) after the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (c) is referred to, the winning combination is determined, and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined according to the winning combination. At a predetermined timing (before the start of the game), it is determined whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section.

In the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7 (c), "passing lip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section, rather than when "passing lip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. In that case, the percentage of decisions to shift to a pseudo-bonus is higher. However, the mode in which "communication lip 2" is given preferential treatment over "communication lip 1" is not limited to this. For example, if "passing lip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section, it may be decided to shift to the pseudo bonus with a predetermined probability, but "passing lip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. In that case, it may not be possible to decide to shift to a pseudo-bonus.

In the production section (normal game), if it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. The transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo-bonus, or may be a mode after the end of the pseudo-bonus. Further, as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus, and when the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) described later is not performed.

In the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f), "passing lip 2" was determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section, rather than when "passing lip 1" was determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. In the case, the rate at which it is decided to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player is higher. However, the mode in which "communication lip 2" is given preferential treatment over "communication lip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Through Lip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section, it may be decided to shift to the mode which is relatively advantageous to the player with a predetermined probability, but as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section, " When the "passing lip 1" is determined, it may not be possible to decide to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

In the production section (normal game), if it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the number of ceiling games is updated (addition method or subtraction method may be used), and the ceiling game. When the number reaches the number of ceiling games associated with the current mode (or predetermined at the time of transition to the advantageous section, etc.), it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus. In this case, it is possible to make sure that the "winning (current game)" is decided, or it is possible to make sure that the "winning (next game)" is decided. In addition, any of these can be determined by lottery.

In the production section (normal game), when it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus due to the arrival of the number of ceiling games, a mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode. The transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo-bonus, or may be a mode after the end of the pseudo-bonus.

The processing related to the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of subflag, and the rest are the same processing contents, so that the same lottery table and control flow Can be controlled using. In addition, the processing related to the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of subflag, and the rest is the same processing content, so the same lottery table and control flow are used. Can be controlled.

In addition, if "winning (this time game)" is not provided as the type of winning of the pseudo-bonus, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is already determined at the timing when the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined, and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is also determined. Since the number of ceiling games can also be updated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the pseudo-bonus transition processing at the time of reaching the ceiling can be performed together in one process. can. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) can be collectively performed in one process.

Returning to the explanation of the playability of the first gaming machine. As described above, when it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus in the production section (normal game) and the pseudo-bonus is started (“pseudo-bonus start” in FIG. 5), it shifts to the increase section (pseudo-bonus). .. Further, as described above, in the production section (normal game), when the game is controlled to the end A mode or the end B mode and the game of 32 games is digested without shifting to the pseudo bonus (in FIG. 5, "the end of the advantageous section". (Via ending A and B) ”), shift to a non-advantageous section. Further, when the condition of the limit processing shown in FIG. 16 described later is satisfied, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (“end of advantageous section (limit processing)” in FIG. 5), and as a result, Move to a non-advantageous section.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a ceiling shortening lottery is performed when the pseudo-bonus is started. Specifically, the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (e) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the number of ceiling games after the end of the pseudo-bonus according to the current mode. In FIG. 8 (e), "non-winning" means that the number of ceiling games is not shortened, and "winning (number of ceiling games = 0 update)" is "winning (number of ceiling games = 0 update)" regardless of the mode after the pseudo bonus ends. , Means that the number of ceiling games to be set is set to "0" (shortened). The ceiling shortening lottery can be performed not only when the pseudo-bonus is started, but also every game during the pseudo-bonus.

If it is decided not to shorten the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling shortening lottery, and if you do not have the 1G consecutive stock described later when the pseudo bonus ends, the number of ceiling games according to the current mode Is set (in the end mode, the advantageous section ends after 32 games have passed (cleared accordingly), so it is not set, but the number of ceiling games may be temporarily set here). , The pseudo-bonus ends (“pseudo-bonus end” in FIG. 5), and the game shifts to the production section (normal game). On the other hand, if it is decided to shorten the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling shortening lottery, "0 games" is set as the number of ceiling games when the pseudo bonus ends. As a result, the pseudo-bonus will be started again from the next game after the end of the pseudo-bonus. In this case, since the pseudo bonus is started when the number of ceiling games is reached, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in the game in which "fixed combination" or "middle che" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section). .. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In addition, the transition destination mode may be determined even when the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section other than the above is determined, but in this case, in principle, the mode which is relatively disadvantageous compared to the current mode shifts. In order not to be determined as the first mode, another mode transition lottery table having a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) may be referred to.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in the game that wins "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B"). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In this case, as in the case of the above, in principle, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (f) is a lottery value so that a mode relatively disadvantageous compared to the current mode is not determined as the transition destination mode. Another mode transition lottery table with a different value may be referenced.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), 1G consecutive lottery is performed for each game. Specifically, the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 7D is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to generate the 1G consecutive lot according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section or the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Will be done. In addition, in (d) of FIG. 7, "non-winning" means that 1G series is not generated, and "winning (1G series + 1)" has one right to generate 1G series (1G series stock). It means that it is given (1G continuous stock counter is added by 1). It should be noted that a plurality of (maximum 255) 1G continuous stocks can be stocked (stored) by the 1G continuous stock counter. Therefore, a plurality of 1G continuous stocks may be given in one pseudo bonus. Further, the 1G continuous lottery table can be configured so that a plurality of 1G continuous lottery can be given by one 1G continuous lottery.

When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G series stock counter is 1 or more (that is, if you have 1G series stock), one 1G series stock is consumed (1G series stock counter becomes (1 is subtracted), and the pseudo-bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo-bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus according to the right of 1G continuous stock is started, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery is not performed. On the other hand, when the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is not 1 or more at the end of the pseudo bonus (that is, when the 1G consecutive stock is not held), or when the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery is not won, The number of ceiling games is set according to the current mode (in the end mode, the advantageous section ends after 32 games have passed (cleared accordingly), so it is not set, but the number of ceiling games is tentative here. It may be set), the pseudo-bonus ends (“pseudo-bonus end” in FIG. 5), and the game shifts to the production section (normal game).

If you win the ceiling shortening lottery and also have 1G consecutive stock, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery will be prioritized, and after the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the 1G consecutive stock will be given. It may be executed, or the 1G continuous stock may be prioritized, and after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G continuous stock is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening may be executed. In the latter case, it is sufficient to separately store the information that can be carried over because there is a shortening of the ceiling.

In the first gaming machine, as an example of the configuration of the increase section (pseudo-bonus), the one that continues for "55 games" and can acquire a maximum of 275 cards is given as an example, but the configuration of the pseudo-bonus is limited to this. No. For example, the pseudo-bonus is configured as a "pseudo-BB (big bonus)", and a "pseudo-RB (regular bonus)", which is a pseudo-bonus that can be continued for "22 games" and can acquire up to 110 cards, is installed. You may do so. In this case, when it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus (grant the right) in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, when reaching the ceiling, in the 1G continuous lottery, the type (for example, "pseudo-BB") is used. Whether to do it or to make it a "pseudo RB") may be determined with a predetermined probability (for example, 50% each). The value of the "pseudo RB" may be different from that of the "pseudo BB" (more specifically, the value is lower than that of the "pseudo BB"). Therefore, for example, the number of continuous games is "pseudo BB". It is the same as "BB", but by setting the bell navigation rate (notification probability that information on the stop operation is notified) to be low, it is possible to make a difference in the maximum number of sheets that can be acquired and make the values different. Further, when starting the "pseudo RB", a reel effect in which the "BAR" symbols are displayed in the main display window 4 or a reel effect in which "red 7-red 7-BAR" is displayed is performed. You can do it like this. Furthermore, the increase interval is not limited to what is configured as a pseudo-bonus. For example, it can be configured as an AT state or an ART state in which the number of continuous games (game period) can be changed.

Further, if the execution condition of the limit processing shown in FIG. 16 described later is satisfied during the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (in FIG. 5, "end of the advantageous section by the limit processing"). ), As a result, it shifts to a non-advantageous section.

In the first gaming machine, the above-mentioned game flow is basically based on the premise that the game is played in a three-card bet state. Therefore, when the game is played in a two-card bet state, for example, various lottery using (a) to (d) of FIG. 7, (e) and (f) of FIG. 8 and the like are not performed, and various lottery is performed. The number of ceiling games is also not updated. Further, when the game is played in the two-card bet state during the pseudo-bonus, the medals are not increased in the two-card bet state, so that the pseudo-bonus is not an increase section. That is, in the first gaming machine, the player is basically disadvantaged when playing a game in a two-card bet state.

Here, when the game is played in a two-card bet state, a lottery related to the advantageous section (AT) (for example, (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8 and the like are used. Although various lottery) and processing (for example, updating the number of ceiling games, etc.) are not performed, the above-mentioned advantageous section game number counter for the number of games limiter and the above-mentioned advantageous section payout counter for the payout number limiter are updated. Should be done. Since these limiters have a function of appropriately suppressing gambling by limiting the number of games staying in the advantageous section and the upper limit of the number of acquired games, these counters are not updated in the two-card bet state. If this is the case, the number of games staying in the advantageous section and the upper limit of the number of acquired games may be exceeded due to the intervention of the game in the two-card bet state, and as a result, the gambling may not be appropriately suppressed. To get. Therefore, it is desirable that the limiter counter is configured so that it can be updated every game regardless of the number of bets.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the above-mentioned game flow is basically based on the premise that the gaming is performed in a non-bonus state. Therefore, when the game is played in the bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), for example, various lottery using (a) to (d) of FIG. 7, (e) and (f) of FIG. It will not be played, and the number of ceiling games will not be updated. In addition, when the bonus state is reached during the pseudo-bonus, the bonus state is configured as a state in which the expected increase value of medals is lower than the non-bonus state (more specifically, the non-bonus state 3-card bet state). , The period during the pseudo-bonus may not be the increase section. That is, the first gaming machine is configured so that the player may be disadvantaged if he / she plays a game in a bonus state.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, it is recommended to play a game in a three-card bet state between the two BB flags (in the present embodiment, the three-card bet state between the two BB flags is a "recommended game". It may be described as a "state" and other states as a "deprecated gaming state"). That is, in the first gaming machine, 2BB is a bonus winning combination only in the 2-card bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 2BB between the 2BB flags wins only in the 2-card bet state and wins in the 3-card bet state. It is configured not to. Further, 3BB is a bonus winning combination only in the 3-card bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 3BB between the 3BB flags wins only in the 3-card bet state and does not win in the 2-card bet state. Further, there is no case where 3BB wins between the 2BB flags, and there is no case where 2BB wins between the 3BB flags.

Then, in the first gaming machine, using these configurations, for example, 2BB is won in a two-card bet state between non-flags (without winning 2BB) to make it between two BB flags, and then a three-card bet state. If the game is played in, it is possible to play the game in the above-mentioned recommended game state without worrying about whether or not to win the bonus role.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the ceiling shortening lottery is performed during the pseudo-bonus. Looking at the ceiling shortened lottery table shown in FIG. 8 (e), when the current mode is one of the guaranteed mode, the heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, and the heaven C mode, 1 While there is a probability of / 8 (32/256) to win the ceiling shortening lottery, in other modes, the ceiling shortening lottery is not won. That is, in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games", and in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is larger than that, the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games". The number of ceiling games is not reduced.

Even in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is larger than "32 games", the number of ceiling games has a lower probability (for example, 1/64) than in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games". May be determined to be shortened.

Further, the mode of reducing the number of ceiling games is not limited to the above. For example, if "32 games" is shortened to a predetermined number of games (0 to 31 games), the same effect can be exerted. Therefore, the number of games to be shortened when the ceiling shortening lottery is won is further determined. Alternatively, in the ceiling shortening lottery, the number of games to be shortened may be determined in advance.

Further, the opportunity for the ceiling shortening lottery to be performed is not limited to the above. For example, during the pseudo-bonus, a ceiling shortening lottery may be performed for each game. Also, in the advantageous section (normal game), when the current mode is one of the guaranteed mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, the ceiling shortening lottery is performed for each game. It may be. In these cases, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section may be referred to to determine whether or not to win the ceiling shortening lottery.

Further, as described above, in the first gaming machine, 1G continuous lottery is performed during the pseudo-bonus. Here, looking at the 1G continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 7D, the 1G continuous stock may be given regardless of the current mode. That is, regardless of whether or not the mode is such that the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the right to continue the pseudo bonus can be granted.

The mode of granting the right is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the 1G continuous lottery is prevented in consideration of the fact that the ceiling shortening lottery is performed, and the number of ceiling games is larger than "32 games". It is possible to prevent the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high by performing the 1G continuous lottery at the time.

Further, the opportunity for the 1G continuous lottery to be performed is not limited to the above. For example, the 1G continuous lottery may be performed in the advantageous section (directing section) other than the pseudo bonus, and the 1G continuous stock stocked as a result may be digested in the next pseudo bonus.

Although not shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the first gaming machine is in an advantageous state at the start of the pseudo-bonus or during the pseudo-bonus when the current mode is the heaven mode. A special bonus medium effect to suggest that there is a certain probability is executed. Therefore, when the effect during the special bonus is executed, it can be expected that the ceiling shortening lottery will be executed. In addition, this special bonus effect may be executed with a 100% probability when the ceiling shortening lottery is won. In this way, for example, if the special bonus mid-effect is executed at the start of the pseudo-bonus, it is suggested that he is at least staying in heaven mode, and it is expected that he may have won the ceiling shortening lottery. You can feel it. Further, the effect during the special bonus may be executed with a predetermined probability or a 100% probability even when the 1G continuous lottery is won during the pseudo-bonus. In this way, (1) heaven mode only, (2) heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning, (3) heaven mode + 1G consecutive winning, (4) heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning + 1G consecutive winning, (5) 1G consecutive winning It is possible to suggest various possibilities such as winning only, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, when it is determined that the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) is controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) ends (for example). , In heaven mode), the period can be further shortened, so even if the playing period of a series of advantageous sections is limited (for example, when limit processing is executed), the player It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game by making it possible to play the game in a state where the degree of advantage is as high as possible.

Further, in the first gaming machine, even if it is not determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends (for example, in the case of the end mode), the right (for example, in the case of the end mode). Since the advantageous state may be started again by granting (1G continuous stock), it is possible to raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

Further, although not shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the "determined combination" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section (that is, "F_confirmed cherry" or "F_confirmed cherry" or "F_". If the "reach eye" is determined as the internal winning combination) and the mode transition lottery described above determines that the mode shifts to heaven C mode, the probability is 1/2 (this probability is arbitrary). ), A special lock effect can be performed. In addition, even when the sub-flag "middle che" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined (that is, when "F_middle cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination), the player also has a "fixed combination" as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Since it is possible to receive the same benefits as when "" is determined, when the sub-flag "Middle Che" is determined when the advantageous section is won, and when "fixed combination" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous section is won. Similarly, a special lock effect may be made feasible.

Here, since the "fixed role" is a role that also confirms the pseudo bonus transition (see (c) in FIG. 7), the player shifts to the pseudo bonus and shifts to the heaven C mode when the special lock effect is executed. It has become possible to recognize that there was a problem, and it has become very interesting for players. The special lock effect is configured as, for example, an effect in which the game operation (stop operation) is invalidated for about 20 seconds at the start of the game. During this period, a special reel effect in which each reel vibrates or rotates in the reverse direction may be performed, or a special image or the like that is not normally displayed may be displayed on the main effect display unit 21. It may be. Further, a special music that is not normally output may be output. Of course, it is also possible to produce by combining these. Further, although the game operation is not invalidated, these effects can be performed until the player performs the next game operation (that is, the effects are executed to the end or canceled halfway. It is also possible to leave it to the player to decide whether to proceed with the game).

However, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 16 described later, for example, even if the player stays in the heaven C mode, the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated by executing the limit process. , It may not be desirable to perform the above-mentioned special lock effect many times.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special lock effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous sections. Specifically, in the series of advantageous sections, when it is first decided to execute the special lock effect, the special lock effect is executed, but in the same series of advantageous sections thereafter, the same conditions are satisfied. Even if it is established, it is controlled so that the special lock effect is not executed. As a method, once the special lock effect is executed, information indicating that fact is stored, and if the information is stored within the same series of advantageous sections after that, the special lock is originally performed. The decision as to whether or not to execute the effect may not be made, or the decision is made, but when the information is stored, it indicates that the decision result is executed. However, it may be rewritten to indicate that it is not executed. Then, the stored information may be cleared when the advantageous section ends.

The mode in which the execution of the special lock effect is restricted is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit of the number of times that the execution of the special lock effect is restricted may be set as "2 times" or "3 times" instead of "1 time". That is, the execution of the special lock effect is restricted, but the upper limit may be set as a plurality of times. This can be appropriately set according to the expected value of the ball output per special lock effect.

Further, the conditions for determining whether or not the special lock effect is executed are not limited to those described above. That is, in the above, the mode transition is performed with the winning of the "fixed role" as an opportunity, and it is determined whether or not the special lock effect is executed on the condition that the mode is the heaven C mode. However, for example, since the mode may shift to heaven C mode due to an opportunity other than the winning of the "fixed role" (see (f) in FIG. 8), a special lock effect is also executed in these cases. It is assumed that a decision is made as to whether or not the game is played, and the special lock effect is executed with a predetermined probability (the probability may be the same as when the winning of the "fixed role" is triggered, or it may be a different probability). It may be decided that it will be done.

In addition, for example, with the winning of the "fixed role" as an opportunity, first, it is assumed that whether or not the special lock effect is executed is determined, and when it is decided that the special lock effect is executed, heaven You may shift to C mode. That is, the special lock effect may be executed according to the decision to shift to the heaven C mode, or the heaven C mode may be executed according to the decision to execute the special lock effect. You may want to move to.

Further, for example, the degree of progress of the game in the advantageous section may be adopted as a condition for determining whether or not the special lock effect is executed. For example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described later is less than "750", or when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter or the control payout number counter described later is less than "1201". , When the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described later becomes "750" or more after the determination as to whether or not the special lock effect is executed is performed as described above, or the advantage described later. When the value of the section payout counter or the control payout counter becomes "1201" or more, it is not determined whether or not the special lock effect is executed in the same series of advantageous sections thereafter. You can also do it.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the gaming period of a series of advantageous sections is limited to a certain period (see FIG. 16 described later). Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if control information having a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, heaven C mode) is set a plurality of times, a special effect (for example, a special lock effect) is provided each time. Is controlled so that is never done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game while suppressing the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is determined that the pachinko / pachislot machine is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) in a series of advantageous sections, triggered by the winning of a specific combination (for example, a “fixed combination”). , Control information (for example, heaven C mode) having a high degree of advantage for the player may be set. Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if such a case occurs a plurality of times, it is controlled so that a special effect (for example, a special lock effect) is not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game while suppressing the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine the secondary information (for example, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section) according to the determined internal winning combination, and the secondary information according to the combination of the displayed symbols (for example). For example, it is possible to determine the advantageous section winning sub-flag), and whether or not to give an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information on the player's stop operation is notified according to the determined secondary information. It is possible to decide.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, not only when the internal winning combination is determined, but also when the combination of symbols is displayed, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation regarding the granting of the advantageous state, so that the advantageous state can be obtained. It is possible to diversify the playability related to granting.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the combination of the displayed symbols are both managed as common secondary information, which is advantageous. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when the bet game value is the first amount (for example, 3 cards), the first special combination (for example, 3BB) can be won, while the second special combination (for example, 3 cards) can be won. , 2BB) is not allowed to win. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount (for example, two cards), the second special combination can be won, but the first special combination cannot be won. In addition, when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won, a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "upward right lip") is displayed in the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags), and the first 2 It is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") in a special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags) (see FIG. 15 described later).

Then, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine different secondary information depending on whether the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed or the combination of specific symbols is displayed. That is, in the first gaming machine, even if the same specific combination is determined, the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed depending on which special permission state is set, which is advantageous. It is possible to further diversify the game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition of the state.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed.

Here, in the first gaming machine, since the combination of the predetermined symbol and the combination of the specific symbols are both combinations of symbols related to the re-game, it is said that the re-game is activated regardless of which one is displayed. The same benefits will be granted.

The mode of granting the same privilege is not limited to the above. For example, a specific role is configured as a specific small role related to the addition of game value. Then, when winning a specific small winning combination, for example, in the first special permission state, one card (this value is arbitrary and may be another value equal to or less than the bet game value, or bet. A combination of predetermined symbols to which the game value of (which may exceed the value of the game value) (a combination of symbols related to the addition of the game value corresponding to the "right-up lip") is displayed, and the second special permission is given. If it is in the state, the combination of specific symbols to which the same number of game values as when the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed (the combination of symbols related to the addition of the game value corresponding to the "parallel lip") is displayed. You may.

In addition, the combination of the predetermined symbol and the combination of the specific symbol are both "off" symbol combinations (although it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state, so the symbol is different from the pure "off" case. It may be configured as a combination of identifiable symbols). Even in this case, the value remains the same.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is in the state. It is possible to diversify the game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the granting of an advantageous state. In addition, in a game in which a specific role is determined, the same privilege is given regardless of the special permission state, so even if the game playability is changed, the player directly disadvantages. It is possible to prevent it from being covered.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode in the case of winning a specific combination or in the second special permission state, so that a specific combination of symbols can be displayed. It may be configured so that it is not possible to display a combination of specific symbols when the stop operation is not performed in the mode.

Then, at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, it may be possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state. When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to make the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state different depending on whether the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed. good.

In addition, when a specific combination is won, a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in the case of the first special permission state, and the stop operation is performed in the specific mode in the second special permission state. Is performed, the combination of specific symbols may be displayed, and when the stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, the combination of predetermined symbols may be displayed.

In this case, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate for at least one reel (in the present embodiment, this may be described as "pressing position ○", "pressing position correct answer", etc.). When the combination of specific symbols is displayed and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (in this embodiment, this may be explained as "pressing position ×", "incorrect answer of pressing position", etc.), the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. It can be configured as displayed. As a result, the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed due to the player's stop operation (timing), so that the player can concentrate more on the game and improve the interest of the game. can.

Further, as described above, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination. In this case, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate for at least one reel (when the pressing position is ○), the specific symbol is used. The combination is displayed and a predetermined number of game values are given, and when the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (when the pressing position is ×), the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values are given. can do. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Further, the predetermined number may be given more game value than the specific number. In addition, a predetermined number may be given a game value less than a specific number. Further, at least one of a combination of specific symbols and a combination of predetermined symbols may be used as a combination of symbols when an omission occurs. That is, either a predetermined number or a specific number may be set to "0". As a result, not only can the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state be changed due to (timing) the player's stop operation, but also the content of the direct privilege can be changed, so that the player can change. It is possible to concentrate more on the game, further diversify the game playability, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, if there is only one type of specific combination, the timing at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate is also limited. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations at different timings at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. For example, in one reel, when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing, the stop operation is appropriate and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed. When the first specific combination and the stop operation timing are the second timing different from the first timing, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation. And when the timing is other than the second timing, the second specific combination in which the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed without the appropriate stop operation, and the timing of the stop operation is the first timing and the second timing. When the third timing is different, the combination of specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the timing is other than the third timing, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed without the appropriate stop operation. A third specific combination is provided, and these may be won with the same winning probability.

Further, in this case, the specific combination is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct answer pressing order), and when the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of the incorrect answer pressing order), the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It can be configured as displayed. As a result, the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed due to the player's stop operation (procedure), so that the player can concentrate more on the game and improve the interest of the game. can.

In addition, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination as described above. In this case, when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct push order), a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a predetermined number of games are played. When the value is given and the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of incorrect answering order), a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values can be given. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Further, the predetermined number may be given more game value than the specific number. In addition, a predetermined number may be given a game value less than a specific number. Further, at least one of a combination of specific symbols and a combination of predetermined symbols may be used as a combination of symbols when a dropout occurs. That is, either a predetermined number or a specific number may be set to "0". As a result, not only can the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state be changed due to the player's stop operation (procedure), but also the content of the direct privilege can be changed, so that the player can change. It is possible to concentrate more on the game, further diversify the game playability, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, if there is only one type of specific combination, the appropriate batting order is also limited. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations having different appropriate batting orders. For example, when the left first stop is performed, a specific symbol combination is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the middle / right first stop is performed, the specific symbol combination is not displayed without an appropriate stop operation. When the first specific combination and the middle first stop are performed, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the left / right first stop is performed, the specific symbol is not performed as an appropriate stop operation. The combination is not displayed. When the second specific combination and the right first stop are displayed, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the left / middle first stop is performed, the appropriate stop operation is not performed. A third specific combination is provided in which the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and these may be won with the same winning probability.

Up to this point, in the unit game that wins the specific combination, the transition determination process to the advantageous section in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section due to the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing and batting order of the stop operation) and the advantageous section It was stated that the judgment process regarding the granting of the advantageous state in (including the pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the mode transition lottery, and other processes for changing the advantage of the game situation in the advantageous section) is changed. Of these, changes that are relatively disadvantageous to the player (which may result in disadvantage) can be regarded as the above-mentioned penalties. Therefore, when such a change occurs, an arbitrary effect (warning notification) for calling attention may be generated.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won, it is more likely that an advantageous state will be given when the combination of specific symbols is displayed than when the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. It has become. That is, on the premise of betting three cards, the second special permission state (for example, between the 2BB flags) is in a state in which the granting of an advantageous state is given preferential treatment over the first special permission state (for example, between the 3BB flags). Is.

In addition, in the first game machine, when a predetermined combination (for example, "pushing order bell B" described later) is won, a combination of assigned symbols (for example, eight payouts) can be given regardless of the hitting order in the first special permission state. On the other hand, in the second special permission state, if the hitting order is the predetermined correct answer pressing order, the combination of the given symbols is displayed, but the hitting order is defined in advance. If the correct answer is not in the correct push order, the combination of the given symbols will not be displayed, and the game value will not be given. It is configured to display a combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols to be paid out on one sheet). That is, if the operation of the advantageous state is not taken into consideration, the first special permission state is a state in which the granting of the game value is given preferential treatment over the second special permission state.

That is, if the player plays a game in a three-card bet state between the 3BB flags even in a deprecated gaming state, the probability of granting an advantageous state is not given preferential treatment, but the game value when the advantageous state is not operating. Since the grant probability is given preferential treatment, the game can be advanced in a state where the difference in the inclination value between when the advantageous state is operating and when it is not operating is relatively small. In this way, a state in which the player is less likely to be able to rapidly increase the game value but the player's game value is less likely to decrease can be defined as, for example, a "stable state".

On the other hand, if the player plays the game in the recommended gaming state, the probability of giving the advantageous state is given preferential treatment, but the probability of giving the game value when the advantageous state is not operating is not given preferential treatment, so that the advantageous state operates. The game can be advanced in a state where the difference in the inclination value between when it is operating and when it is not operating is relatively large. In this way, a state in which the player is likely to be able to rapidly increase the game value but the player's game value is likely to decrease can be defined as, for example, a "rough wave state".

Here, the method for creating two states, a stable state and a rough wave state, is not limited to the above. For example, in the "stable state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the transition probability of the pseudo-bonus is higher than in the "rough wave state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of the heaven mode is higher than in the "rough wave state". Lower. Further, in the "rough wave state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the transition probability of the pseudo-bonus is lower than that in the "stable state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of the heaven mode is set higher than in the "stable state". Increase. In this way, in the "stable state", it is easy to hit the pseudo bonus for the first time, but it is difficult to make a series of villas. Can be created. As described above, the stop control of the predetermined combination may be changed between the 2BB flags and the 3BB flags, or may be different from this (that is, no preferential treatment is given between the 3BB flags).

[5-2. First game machine design layout configuration]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 9, the symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first gaming machine, "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "red blank", "yellow blank", "yellow blank", " Ten kinds of symbols of "white blank 1" and "white blank 2" are arranged at the positions shown in FIG. 9 on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Further, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[5-3. Internal winning combination of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15, the internal winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine. 11 to 14 are diagrams showing an example of the symbol combination table of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination of the first gaming machine, the stop operation mode, the display combination, and the like. That is, in the following, any symbol is used according to the type of internal winning combination drawn in the first gaming machine and the stop operation mode (that is, batting order, stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won. (Display combination, winning combination, stop display mode, display result, etc.) can be displayed.

First, in the first gaming machine, in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 26) described later, each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 10 wins with the probability (lottery value / probability denominator: 65536) shown in FIG. It should be noted that the combinations of symbols that are permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "corresponding symbol combinations" in FIG. Further, in FIGS. 11 to 14, "BB" indicates a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, "REP" indicates a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and "FRU" indicates a combination of symbols related to the small combination. Is shown.

"F_2BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a two-card bet state in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), while a game is played in a three-card bet state. It is configured so that if it is broken, it will not be decided as an internal winning role. In a game in which "F_2BB" is won in a two-card bet state, or in a game in which "off" occurs between the 2BB flags, "BB01" is displayed if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, and the 2BB state (based on 2BB) is displayed. Move to the bonus state). On the other hand, even between the 2BB flags, "BB01" may not be displayed in the 3-card bet state.

"F_3BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a 3-card bet state in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), while a game is played in a 2-card bet state. It is configured so that if it is broken, it will not be decided as an internal winning role. In a game in which "F_3BB" is won in a 3-card bet state, or in a game in which "missing" is made between the 3BB flags, "BB02" is displayed if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, and the 3BB state (based on 3BB). Move to the bonus state). On the other hand, even between the 3BB flags, "BB02" may not be displayed in the two-card bet state.

In the 2BB state and the 3BB state, the lottery value in the "bonus state" column is referred to in FIG. 10, and the internal winning combination is determined (the number of cards that can be started in the game is only 3 bets). During the 2BB state and the 3BB state, it is always controlled to the state in which the RB, which is the first-class special accessory, is operating (RB state). In the RB state, control is repeated such that when two prizes are generated or two games are played after the operation, the RB state is once terminated and then activated again. Further, in the first gaming machine, the end condition of the 2BB state is defined as that more than one medal has been paid out in the 2BB state, and the end condition of the 3BB state is the end condition of more than 176 medals in the 3BB state. Is stipulated to have been paid out.

Here, when the 2BB state or the 3BB state ends, the special mode transition process is performed. For example, if the mode is changed to the bonus state (the mode is not changed during the bonus state, which is synonymous with the end of the bonus state), that is, if the current mode is "start mode", the transition destination Mode is "start mode". If the current mode is any of "normal A mode", "normal B mode", "heaven preparation mode", and "chance mode", the transition destination mode is "normal A mode". If the current mode is either "end A mode" or "end B mode", the transition destination mode is "end A mode". If the current mode is any of "guaranteed mode", "heaven A mode", "heaven B mode", and "heaven C mode", the transition destination mode is "guaranteed mode".

"F_Replay A" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, between the non-flags and the 2BB flags, regardless of the stop operation mode, either "REP64" to "REP72" (these make the "replay" symbol a lower straight line or a middle straight line. Since they are to be displayed, they can be collectively referred to as "parallel rip". Further, "REP64" to "REP71" can be collectively referred to as "lower rip", and "REP72" is "middle rip". (Can be called "rip") is displayed, and a replay is given. On the other hand, between the 3BB flags, "REP73" (this can be referred to as "right-up lip" because the "replay" symbol is displayed upward to the right) regardless of the stop operation mode. It is displayed and a replay is given.

"F_Replay B" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured so as not to be determined as an internal winning combination. When it is determined as an internal winning combination, "parallel lip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in any state, and a replay is given.

"F_cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured so as not to be determined as an internal winning combination. When the winning combination is determined, the "middle rip" is displayed and the replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, either "REP28", "REP60" to "REP63" (these are for displaying the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L at the bottom. Because of this, these can be collectively referred to as "cherry rips"), and replays are granted. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, other rips (for example, “REP57” to “REP59”) are displayed, and a replay is given.

"F_confirmed cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured so as not to be determined as an internal winning combination. When the winning combination is determined, the "middle rip" is displayed and the replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", and if the pressing position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, any of "REP42" to "REP56" (these are). The "cherry" symbol is displayed in the lower row on the left reel 3L, and symbols such as "REP42" that can raise the expectations of the player on other reels are also displayed. "Confirmed cherry lip") is displayed, and replay is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position x, other rips (for example, the above-mentioned "cherry rip" and "REP29" to "REP41") are displayed, and a re-game is given. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

"F_middle cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured so as not to be determined as an internal winning combination. When the winning combination is determined, the "middle rip" is displayed and the replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", and if the pressing position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, any of "REP15" to "REP19" (these are). Since the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the middle stage on the left reel 3L, these can be collectively referred to as "middle stage cherry lip"), and a replay is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, other rips (for example, “REP20” to “REP27”) are displayed, and a replay is given. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

The "F_reach eye" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured so as not to be determined as an internal winning combination. When the winning combination is determined, the "middle rip" is displayed and the replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, when the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", any one of "REP01" to "REP14" regardless of the stop operation mode (these are customarily a player). It is configured as a combination of symbols that can definitely notify (or suggest) the transition to a state that is advantageous to the player, and these can be collectively referred to as "reach eye lip"), and the replay is displayed. Granted. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

"F_watermelon" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, any one of "FRU10" to "FRU12" (since these are for displaying "watermelon" symbols side by side, these are displayed. "Watermelon") is displayed, and if a 3-card bet state, 3 medals are paid out, and if a 2-card bet state, 2 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, either “FRU08” or “FRU09” (since these are not displayed side by side with the “watermelon” symbol, these can be collectively referred to as “watermelon spill”). Is displayed and one medal is paid out. In addition, in the case of the pressing position ×, it is also possible to configure the medals to be paid out so that the number of medals paid out is 0 by causing the medals to be missed.

"F_Bell 123A1", "F_Bell 123A2", "F_Bell 132A1", "F_Bell 132A2", "F_Bell 213A1", "F_Bell 213A2", "F_Bell 231A1", "F_Bell 231A2", "F_Bell 231A2" "Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" are configured to be determinable as internal winnings regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In addition, these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell A".

As shown in FIG. 15, "pushing order bell A" serves as a small pushing order of 6 choices (one of "batting order 1" to "batting order 6" is the correct batting order). If the internal winning combination is determined and the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct batting order, the "downward bell" ("FRU03"), "upper bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02") ), "Middle bell" ("FRU04"), "Right-up bell" ("FRU05"), "Koyama bell" ("FRU06"), and "Lower bell" ("FRU07"). Is displayed, 8 medals are paid out in the 3-card bet state, and 2 medals are paid out in the 2-card bet state. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the pressing position is halved in the remaining stop operations, and the pressing position is ◯. If there is, one of the winning "one-card combination" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") is displayed and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the medals will not be paid out due to omission. If the first stop operation is not correct, there is a 1/8 chance that the remaining stop operation will be the pressing position ○, and if the pressing position is ○, any of the winning "one-card combination" will be displayed. One medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the medals will not be paid out due to omission.

"F_Bell 123B1", "F_Bell 123B2", "F_Bell 132B1", "F_Bell 132B2", "F_Bell 213B1", "F_Bell 213B2", "F_Bell 231B1", "F_Bell 231B2", "F_Bell 231B2" The "bell 312B1", "F_bell 312B2", "F_bell 321B1", and "F_bell 321B2" are configured to be determinable as internal winnings regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In addition, these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell B".

As shown in FIG. 15, the "push order bell B" does not have a push order small combination between the 3BB flags in the two-card bet state and the three-card bet state. When determined as an internal winning combination, any of the above "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, 8 medals are paid out in the 3-card bet state, and 2 in the 2-card bet state. One medal is paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the "pushing order bell B" is pushed in a state other than between the 3BB flags in the 3-card bet state (between the non-flags in the 3-card bet state and between the 2BB flags in the 3-card bet state). If the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, one of the above "bells" will be displayed and eight medals will be displayed. Will be paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the pressing position is halved in the remaining stop operations, and the pressing position is ◯. If there is, one of the winning "one-card combination" is displayed and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the medals will not be paid out due to omission. If the first stop operation is not correct, there is a 1/8 chance that the remaining stop operation will be the pressing position ○, and if the pressing position is ○, any of the winning "one-card combination" will be displayed. One medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the medals will not be paid out due to omission.

"8 F_RB combinations" are configured to be determinable as internal winning combinations in the bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, any of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and eight medals are paid out.

"One F_RB combination" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, any of the above-mentioned "single-card combination" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and one card is displayed. Medal is paid out.

The correspondence between the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 10, the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, and the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 15, the stop operation mode, the display combination, and the like is merely an example and is shown in these. The mode is not limited to the above.

For example, in the first gaming machine, "BB02" can be displayed when "BB01" is dropped and becomes "missing" in a 2-bet state where "BB01" can be displayed when it is pure "off". In the 3-bet state, when "BB02" is missed and becomes "missing", when it becomes "missing" due to being in the 3-bet state between the 2BB flags, it is in the 2-bet state between the 3BB flags. As a result, "off" may occur in various states, such as when "off" occurs, when "pushing order small winning combination" is missed and "out" occurs. Therefore, in order to make the combination of symbols displayed as "out of place" different in some or all of these cases, the combination of these different symbols is defined in advance in the symbol combination table, and the internal winning combination is determined. By allowing the display as a "corresponding symbol combination" according to the situation, it is possible to make the combination of the symbols related to the "missing" displayed different depending on the state or the like.

[5-4. Limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, the limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of each limit processing in the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 16, in the first gaming machine, normal limit processing (number of games), normal limit processing (number of payouts), special limit processing (number of games), special limit processing (number of payouts), quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) Each limit processing of (the number of games) and the quasi-limit processing (the number of payouts) is executed. Note that this is an example of executable limit processing, and it is possible to execute limit processing other than each of these limit processing, and some of these limit processing are executed. You can also prevent it from being done.

The normal limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous section are continuously played 1500 times). The advantageous section game number counter starts counting the number of games from the start of the advantageous section (including the production section), and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing). The counting is completed and cleared (initialized). Further, the advantageous section game number counter counts the number of bets regardless of whether the number of bets is 2 or 3. Further, the advantageous section game number counter also counts in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

When the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates), the advantageous section is forcibly terminated regardless of whether it is in the production section or the increase section (pseudo-bonus), and the non-advantageous section is executed. Migrate to. At this time, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the production section or the increase section, information on the current mode, information on the game period of the pseudo-bonus, the number of ceiling games, and the presence or absence of ceiling shortening). All the information (information, various information obtained during the advantageous section such as the value of the 1G continuous stock counter, and various information necessary for controlling the advantageous section) are also cleared (initialized).

The normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes "2401" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2400). In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase number (difference number)") from the time when the advantageous section (including the production section) is started, and is advantageous. When the section is terminated (including the termination due to the operation of the limit processing), the counting is terminated and cleared (initialized). In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter counts the number of bets regardless of whether the number of bets is 2 or 3. In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter counts even in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. In addition, the advantageous section payout counter counts appropriately according to the actual number of payouts (for example, "-2" or "-3") when "missing" or "missing" occurs during the advantageous section. The value to be subtracted. Therefore, if the number of medals does not increase and decreases after the start of the advantageous section, it may become a negative value (or if it becomes a negative value, "0" is always maintained. Can also be configured to be). That is, the advantageous section payout counter can count from the lowest point of the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section to the defined maximum point (difference number: 2400).

When the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operates), the advantageous section is forcibly terminated regardless of whether it is in the production section or the increase section (pseudo-bonus), and the non-advantageous section is executed. Migrate to. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter becomes "1445" or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous section are continuously played 1445 times). The control game number counter starts counting the number of games from the start of the advantageous section (including the effect section), and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process). The counting is completed and cleared (initialized). Further, the control game number counter counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. Further, the control game number counter counts the number when it is in the non-bonus state, and does not count it when it is in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. However, the control game number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section game number counter.

When the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (actuated), if the pseudo-bonus is in progress (that is, during the increase section), the pseudo-bonus is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the pseudo-bonus. When is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not in the pseudo-bonus (that is, in the production section), first, it is forcibly shifted to the pseudo-bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the pseudo-bonus is transferred by executing this special limit process (number of games). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the transferred pseudo-bonus is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

Here, while the value of the advantageous section game number counter where the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates) is "1500", the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates). Focusing on the point that the value of the control game number counter is "1445", the maximum number of games (sustainable period) in the pseudo bonus is "55 games" in the first game machine (Fig.). 5), this difference takes into account the playable period during the pseudo-bonus.

That is, the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed when the game is played for a predetermined regulation period in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit process (number of games) is executed immediately after the start of the pseudo-bonus or in the middle of the pseudo-bonus, the player feels distrust or loss, and the interest of the game is lowered. In some cases. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special limit processing (number of games) is performed in the game before the continuous period (55 games) per increase section, compared to the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. By executing this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss due to the pseudo bonus ending in the middle.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, a special limit process (number of games) is executed in a game that is shorter than the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed by the sustainable period (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) per two additional sections. It may be done. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the continuation period (55 games) + grace period (2 games) per increase section is before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed in the game of. Further, for example, in the case of a specification such as passing through a precursor state before shifting to a pseudo bonus, and if the maximum number of games in this precursor state is "4 games", the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed in the game that is equal to the continuous period (55 games) + maximum precursor period (4 games) before the increased section. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operated) may be any timing as long as it is before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed, and is individual. It shall be possible to set as appropriate according to the game specifications and the like.

The special limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter becomes "2126" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2125). The control payout counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase (difference number)") from the time when the advantageous section (including the effect section) is started, which is advantageous. When the section is terminated (including the termination due to the operation of the limit processing), the counting is terminated and cleared (initialized). Further, the control payout number counter counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. Further, the control payout counter counts the number when it is in the non-bonus state, and does not count it when it is in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

Further, in the control payout number counter, when a "missing" occurs during the advantageous section, a value to be appropriately counted is subtracted according to the actual payout number (for example, "-3 sheets"). However, the control payout counter does not cause "miss" (or difference) when "missing" occurs during the advantageous section (at least when there is a difference from the maximum number of medals paid out). As a result, the number of medals paid out is counted. Specifically, for example, in a game in which a "push order bell A" is won with a 3-card bet, if the hitting order is appropriate, the number of medals paid out (maximum value) is "8" (the difference is "8". On the other hand, if the striking order is not appropriate, the number of medals to be paid out will be "1" (the difference is "-2") if the pressing position is appropriate, and the pressing position is not appropriate. The number of medals to be paid out will be "0" (the difference is "-3") due to the omission, but the control payout counter will be the difference "0" in any case in the game. +5 "is counted.

Further, for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout counter becomes larger than the value of the control payout counter due to the operation of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, the value of the control payout counter is advantageous. It is corrected to the value of the section payout counter. The control payout counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section payout counter.

When the special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (actuated), if the pseudo-bonus is in progress (that is, during the increase section), the pseudo-bonus is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the pseudo-bonus. When is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not in the pseudo-bonus (that is, in the production section), first, it is forcibly shifted to the pseudo-bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the pseudo-bonus is transferred by executing this special limit process (number of payouts). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the transferred pseudo-bonus is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, all the information regarding the above-mentioned advantageous section is also cleared (initialized).

Here, while the value of the advantageous section payout number counter that normally executes (operates) the limit process (number of payouts) is "2401", the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates). Focusing on the point that the value of the control game number counter is "2126", the maximum number of acquired games (the amount of game value that can be granted) in the pseudo bonus is "275" in the first game machine. (See FIG. 5), this difference takes into account the amount of game value that can be granted during the pseudo-bonus.

That is, the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed when the game value corresponding to the predetermined regulated game value amount is given in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed immediately after the start of the pseudo bonus or during the pseudo bonus, the player feels distrust or loss, and the interest of the game is reduced. It may end up. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, a game value amount that is smaller than the game value amount that can be granted per increase section (275 sheets) is given to the game value amount that is normally executed by the limit processing (number of payouts). By sometimes executing a special limit process (number of payouts), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss due to the pseudo bonus ending in the middle.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount that can be granted per two increase sections (275 sheets x 2 sets = 550 sheets) is given compared to the game value amount that is normally executed by the limit process (number of payouts). Special limit processing (number of payouts) may be executed. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the amount of game value that can be granted per increase section (275 sheets) + the grace period is equivalent to the amount of game value that is normally executed by the limit process (number of payouts). The special limit process (number of games) may be executed when a game value amount smaller than the game value amount (8 sheets) to be played is given. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operated) may be any timing as long as it is before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed, and is individual. It shall be possible to set as appropriate according to the game specifications and the like.

In the quasi-limit processing (number of games), the value of the 1G continuous counter (when the ceiling shortening lottery is won and "with ceiling shortening" is added, "1" is further added to the value of the control game number counter. ) Multiplied by "55" (that is, the duration of the pseudo-bonus), and is executed when the addition result is "1390" or more. For example, when the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "55 x 2 = 110", so the value of the control game number counter is "1280". , The quasi-limit process (number of games) will be executed (operated).

For the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts), add "1" to the value of the control payout counter value (if the ceiling shortening lottery is won and "with ceiling shortening" is displayed. ) Is multiplied by "275" (that is, the amount of game value that can be given a pseudo bonus), and this is executed when the addition result is "1851" or more. For example, when the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "275 x 2 = 550", so the value of the control payout counter is "1301". , The quasi-limit process (number of payouts) will be executed (operated). Since both the quasi-limit processing (number of games) and the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) regulate the same contents, after one operating condition is satisfied and the other operating condition is activated, the other operating condition is applied. Even if is established, it is not necessary to operate in duplicate.

When the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the preparation limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates), the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery and ceiling shortening lottery are executed during the pseudo-bonus in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. Will not be done. That is, the extension of the game period in the increasing section is suppressed. The method of suppressing the extension of the game period in the increasing section is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery, the winning probability of the 1G consecutive lottery may be lower than usual, or in the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the winning probability of the ceiling shortening may be lower than usual. .. That is, although the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery and ceiling shortening lottery itself are executed, it may be difficult to win these lottery. Further, for example, in the production section after the execution of the quasi-limit processing (number of games), the lottery value that is the winning in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult to shift to the pseudo-bonus. Alternatively, in the mode transition lottery, the lottery value at which the mode transition that is advantageous to the player is determined may be lowered to make it difficult for the pseudo-bonus to stay in a row.

Further, when the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates), in the subsequent series of advantageous sections, during the production section, a "fixed combination" ((FIG. 7) Special processing is performed at the time of winning a)). Hereinafter, this special process will be described by taking as an example a case where the “fixed combination” is “F_fixed cherry” (hereinafter, may be simply described as “fixed cherry”).

When neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, if the "confirmed cherry" is won during the production section (may be during the increase section), a pseudo bonus transition lottery is drawn. "Winning (next game)" is determined in (see (c) in FIG. 7). Further, in the first gaming machine, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a symbol with high expectations for the player, so in a game in which the stop operation information is not notified, the player is on the left. The general procedure is to stop at one stop and aim at the "cherry" symbol (aiming at the "BAR" symbol as a guide). Therefore, when the game is played according to a general procedure, when the "confirmed cherry" is won, the "cherry" symbol is first stopped at the lower stage of the left reel 3L at the first left stop. If neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating and the "fixed cherry" is won, the left first stop ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2"). ") May be notified to the effect that it should be done. Further, the "winning (next game)" is not limited to the one in which the pseudo bonus is started from the next game, and the pseudo bonus may be started from the game after the next game.

Here, the skilled player stops aiming at the "BAR" symbol also in the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, for example, in order to further determine whether the player is "weak che" or "confirmed cherry". Perform the operation. As a result, it can be recognized that the "BAR" symbols are aligned in the middle of each reel and the "confirmed cherry" is won (see, for example, "REP42" in FIG. 11). On the other hand, the player without skill does not perform the stop operation aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, or cannot perform the stop operation, so that the stop display mode is "weak check". It may not be possible to determine whether it is a "confirmed cherry" (see, for example, "REP28" in FIG. 11).

In the first gaming machine, when neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, the "confirmed cherry" is won, and the "confirmed cherry lip". When the combination of the symbols of is displayed, the special winning sound is output. Also, in the case of winning the "confirmed cherry", the combination of the "confirmed cherry lip" symbols was not displayed, but the special winning sound was also displayed when the combination of the "cherry lip" symbols was displayed. It is designed to be output. The output of the special winning sound may be performed with a probability of 100% or may be performed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%).

In any case, if neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, and if you win the "confirmed cherry", "7 reds will be aligned" at the start of the next game. It is notified that the production is performed and the pseudo bonus is started, and the pseudo bonus is started.

On the other hand, if either the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated and then the "fixed cherry" is won during the production section (which may be during the increase section), a pseudo bonus shift is made. Although the "win (next game)" is once determined in the lottery (see (c) in FIG. 7), this determination result is rewritten to "win (current game)" by executing the special process. Then, at the start of the game this time, it is notified that the "red 7 matching" effect is performed and the pseudo bonus is started, and the pseudo bonus is started.

At this time, in this game, the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "confirmed cherry lip" (including the combination of the symbols of the "cherry lip") and the combination of the symbols of the "middle stage lip" is performed. Information notification (special notification) is performed. For example, in the first gaming machine, a special notification is given to the effect that the first right stop (“batting order 5” and “batting order 6”) should be performed (see FIG. 15). As a result, when neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, the flow of the game is that "confirmed cherry lip" is displayed → the pseudo bonus starts from the next game. After either the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the game is called "middle rip" display by starting the pseudo-bonus from this game and stopping according to the special notification. It is changed to the flow of. It should be noted that the special notification may be performed by the control of the main (main control board 71) side, and as a result, the player does not suffer any disadvantage regardless of the shift to the pseudo bonus. It may be performed by the control only on the sub (sub control board 72) side.

It should be noted that, after either the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the "confirmed cherry" is won, and even though the special notification is given, the "confirmation" is performed. When the combination of "Cherry Lip" symbols is displayed, the special winning sound is not output.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when "F_replay A" or "F_replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, basically the procedure of the stop operation is not notified. Therefore, assuming that the procedure of the stop operation is notified and the "middle stage lip" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is performed, if such a state occurs, one of the cases occurs. There is a possibility that the player will be clearly aware that the quasi-limit process has been activated, and as a result, the interest of the game will be reduced. Therefore, in the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not any of the quasi-limit processes is activated (or even after the operation of any of the quasi-limit processes), "F_Replay A" or When "F_replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification may be performed with a predetermined probability. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural about the special notification being performed. Further, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification is performed even when the pseudo bonus transition lottery is won. Further, in this case, in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery when "F_replay A" or "F_replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, even if the "winning (this time game)" can be determined with a predetermined probability. good.

Up to this point, in order to operate the normal limit processing, the special limit processing, and the quasi-limit processing, the game period of the advantageous section is monitored by using the "number of games" and the "number of payouts" as an example. The conditions under which each limit process is executed are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, and the value of the 1G continuous counter, assuming that each limit process is executed. And whether or not the ceiling is shortened (that is, a variable for operating the quasi-limit processing) and the like can be appropriately changed according to the game specifications, market trends, and the like.

Further, the method for monitoring the game period of the advantageous section is not limited to the above. For example, if the "navigation number" is used to monitor the game period of the advantageous section, the normal limit processing (navigation number), the special limit processing (navigation number), or the quasi-limit processing (navigation) is performed in the same manner as above. The number of times) can also be executed. That is, any element (parameter) whose value can be counted in order to monitor the game period of the advantageous section can be adopted, and the value for which the normal limit processing is normally executed for the adopted element. By defining the value at which the special limit processing is executed and the value at which the quasi-limit processing is executed, it is possible to assume that each limit processing is executed in the same manner as described above.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) and the specific state (for example, the effect section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined period (for example). , When the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more, or the amount of game value given in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more. ), This series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but the game period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445". When the game value amount given in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more). In the case of an advantageous state, a series of advantageous sections are terminated when shifting to a specific state.

That is, in the first gaming machine, a series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to make it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) and the specific state (for example, the effect section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined period (for example, advantageous). When the value of the section game number counter becomes "1500" or more, or when the game value amount given in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more). When this happens, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but the game period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more). When, or when the amount of game value given in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), the advantageous state If not, it shifts to the advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to the specific state, a series of advantageous sections are terminated.

That is, in the first gaming machine, a series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to make it. Further, when ending a series of advantageous sections in this way, if it is not in an advantageous state, it is shifted to an advantageous state and then ended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the sustainable period of the advantageous state (for example, "55 games") or the amount of game value that can be granted (for example, "275 cards"). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of game value given to the player from being extremely regulated while giving consideration to the emotions of the player.

Further, in the first game machine, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted rights (for example, "1G continuous stock" and "ceiling shortening"), but the game period in a series of advantageous sections is a specific period. When the special period is shorter than that and is set according to the number of rights granted (for example, when the value of the control game number counter becomes the value at which the quasi-limit processing (number of games) is executed). Or, when the amount of game value granted in a series of advantageous sections is less than a specific amount and becomes a special amount set according to the number of rights granted (for example, the value of the control payout counter is a quasi-limit). When the processing (number of payouts) reaches the value to be executed), the granting of rights is suppressed in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. As a result, for example, a right that cannot be consumed by the player is granted, and as a result of forcibly ending a series of advantageous sections in such a state, the player feels distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, in counting the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount", for example, it should be originally given due to an operation error of the player, ignoring of instructions, and the like. Even if there is a difference between the amount of game value that was actually given and the amount of game value that was actually given, the count is based on the amount of game value that was originally supposed to be given without considering this difference. It is supposed to be done. As a result, a series of advantageous sections may be extended more than necessary due to the actions of such a player, and unfairness may occur between the player who has performed such an action and the player who has not performed such an action. Since it is possible to prevent it from being stored, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the winning combination (for example, "confirmed cherry") in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed (for example, the state after the quasi-limit processing is activated) is won. When this happens, a special notification is provided to prevent the combination of special symbols (for example, "confirmed cherry lip") that can be clearly recognized by the winning combination of the definite combination from being displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that, for example, the winning of the definite role was a useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when the advantageous state is started in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game is suppressed while suppressing the excessively high gambling. It is possible to consider the emotions of the person. It should be noted that any effect executing means may be used to perform the special notification.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when the special notification is performed, the advantageous state that was originally supposed to be started from the next game is started from this game. As a result, the player can be made to perform the stop operation according to the special notification in a natural flow, so that even when such a special notification is performed, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable. can.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when the granting of rights is not suppressed and a combination of special symbols is displayed by winning a fixed combination, special notification (for example, output of a special winning sound) is performed. On the other hand, it is not possible to give a special notification when a combination of special symbols is displayed by winning a fixed combination in a state where the granting of rights is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that, for example, the winning of the definite role was a useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when the advantageous state is started in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game is suppressed while suppressing the excessively high gambling. It is possible to consider the emotions of the person. It should be noted that any effect executing means may be used to perform the special notification.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, whether or not to perform special notification is determined according to whether or not the winning combination is won, whether or not a combination of special symbols is displayed, and whether or not special notification is performed. I try to decide. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately manage the situation in which the special notification is performed.

Further, in the first game machine, the advantageous section game number counter and the advantageous section payout number counter count regardless of the amount of game value bet, and as a result, not only in the 3-card bet state but also in the 2-card bet state. It is possible to execute normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (number of payouts).

Further, in the first game machine, the control game number counter and the control payout number counter count in the three-card bet state, but do not count in the two-card bet state. Therefore, in the 3-card bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (number of payouts) can be executed, but in the 2-card bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit It does not allow processing (number of payouts) to be performed. Therefore, in the two-card bet state, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated even during the pseudo-bonus by executing the normal limit processing (number of games) or the normal limit processing (number of payouts).

In the first gaming machine, for example, the winning probability of a small winning combination and the number of medals paid out are different between the 3-card bet state and the 2-card bet state (see FIGS. 10 to 15), and the 3-card bet state. It is more disadvantageous for the player to play the game in the state of two bets than to play the game in. However, in this way, the method that is more disadvantageous to the player when playing the game in the state of two bets is not limited to this. For example, when a game is played in a two-card bet state during a pseudo-bonus, the player may be disadvantaged by not notifying the procedure of the stop operation.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, when the gaming value of the first amount (for example, "3 cards") is bet and the game is played, a series of advantageous sections is forced in the middle of the advantageous state. It is possible to end a series of advantageous sections within a certain period of time by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state without being terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said. On the other hand, when a second amount (for example, "2 cards") of the game value is bet and the game is played, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player aware that the game was not performed by the intended game method, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game by the intended game method.

In a series of advantageous sections, it is more disadvantageous for the player when the game is played with the second amount of game value bet than when the game is played with the first amount of game value bet. Therefore, by enabling such a warning, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a more advantageous state, and to play the game in a game method that the player does not intend. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the above.

[5-5. Storage area configuration of the first gaming machine]
Subsequently, the storage area configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a winning flag storage area, a winning operation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a carry-over combination storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a game state flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of an operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a pressing order storage area of the first gaming machine.

(Winning flag storage area, winning operation flag storage area, and symbol code storage area)
First, with reference to FIG. 17, the configurations of the winning flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), the winning operation flag storage area (display combination storage area), and the symbol code storage area will be described. In the first gaming machine, the winning flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area have the same data structure.

Each of the above-mentioned storage areas is composed of storage areas 1 to 26 represented by 1 byte of data. The data stored in each storage area is only the 1-byte data in the "data" column in FIG. 17, but in FIG. 17, for convenience of explanation, a symbol combination associated with the bits of each storage area is used. The "combination" shown (in FIG. 17, the symbol of the reel 3L, the symbol of the reel 3C, and the symbol of the reel 3R are described in this order) and the contents thereof (see FIGS. 11 to 14) are also described.

The data stored in the winning flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination (that is, the type of symbol combination permitted to be displayed in this game). It is used to. For example, when 2BB is won in this game (when it is carried over), "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 1.

The data stored in the winning operation flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the display combination (that is, the type of symbol combination displayed on the effective line in this game). Used to do. For example, when the combination of symbols related to 2BB is displayed on the effective line in this game, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 1.

The data stored in the symbol code storage area enables the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination that can still be displayed on the effective line in this game while at least one of the reels is rotating. Used for For example, in this game, when at least one of the reels is rotating, if the combination of symbols related to 2BB can be displayed on the effective line, "1" is set to bit 0 of the storage area 1. Is stored.

(Carryover storage area)
Subsequently, the configuration of the carry-over combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The carry-over combination storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data.

As a result of the internal lottery process, when the bonus combination of "F_2BB" (2BB) or "F_3BB" (3BB) is determined as the internal winning combination, these bonus combinations are stored in the carry-over combination storage area as the carry-over combination ( "1" is stored in the corresponding bit). The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is retained without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the valid line. In addition, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, in addition to the internal winning combination (small combination / replay combination) determined by the internal lottery process, the carry-over combination (bonus combination) is stored in the winning flag request storage area. It is stored.

(Game status flag storage area)
Subsequently, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The game state flag storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data. For example, when the current gaming state is the 2BB state, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area.

Since the RT state is not provided in the first gaming machine, the game state flag storage area shown in FIG. 19 is not provided with an area indicating the type of RT state, but for example, an RT state is provided. If so, "1" is stored in the bit of the storage area corresponding to the current RT state. In the first gaming machine, data indicating the type of gaming state (mode) in the advantageous section is separately stored in the mode flag storage area described later, but it is stored and managed in this game state flag storage area. You can also do it. The same applies to the non-advantageous section and the game section of the advantageous section. An advantageous section flag storage area (not shown) can be provided and managed, or can be stored and managed in this game state flag storage area. The same applies to the gaming state such as the AT state and the ART state. An AT state (ART state) flag storage area (not shown) can be provided and managed, or can be stored and managed in this game state flag storage area.

(Mode flag storage area)
Subsequently, the configuration of the mode flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The mode flag storage area is composed of a storage area 1 and a storage area 2 represented by 1 byte of data, respectively. For example, when the current mode is the start mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 1. Further, for example, when the current mode is the heaven A mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 2. In the first gaming machine, the pseudo-bonus state is also managed as one of the modes.

(Operation stop button storage area)
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. Bits 0 to 2 in the operation stop button storage area store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated (type of reel that has stopped), and bits 4 to 6 of the stop button that has not yet been operated. Stores data indicating the type (type of reel being rotated).

For example, when the stop button 8L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the stop button 8L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in the bit 4. The main CPU 101 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not been pressed yet, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

(Press order storage area)
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The press order storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data. The pressing order indicates the order in which the stop button is pressed, that is, the pressing order (batting order).

For example, when all the reels are rotating, "1" is stored in bits 0 to 5 of the pressing order storage area. Then, when the stop button 8L is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop), "1" remains stored in bits 0 and 1, but "0" is stored in bits 2 to 5. It will be stored. Then, when the stop button 8C is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop and the "middle" second stop), "1" remains stored in bit 0, but bit 1 remains stored. "0" will be stored. The main CPU 101 identifies the pressing order of the current game based on the data stored in the pressing order storage area.

[6. Processing by the main control circuit]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using each program will be described. In the description of the various processes shown below, a specific example of the processing contents may be described using the specifications of the first gaming machine, but the processing contents of the various processes shown below are limited to this. It's not a thing.

[6-1. Main processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 23, the main process (main operation process) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing procedure. Further, FIG. 23 also shows the power-on processing executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachi-slot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 101 performs a power-on processing (S1). In this process, various processes required when the power is turned on are performed. The details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. The designated storage area here is a storage area such as a winning flag storage area and a winning operation flag storage area, which requires data to be erased for each unit game (game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs medal reception / start check processing (S3). In this process, for example, the input states of the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6, the start switch 7S, and the like are checked, and various processes necessary at the start of the game are performed. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value acquisition process (S4). In this process, an internal lottery random value (for example, in the range of 0 to 65535) and a production random value used in various lottery related to playability (other lottery random values) (for example, in the range of 0 to 65535, or 0 to 0). (Range of 255) and the like are extracted, and the extracted various random values are stored in a random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The acquisition mode of various random number values is not limited to the above. A required number of random numbers can be appropriately obtained from each predetermined numerical range (for example, a range of 0 to 65535, a range of 0 to 32767, a range of 0 to 255, a range of 0 to 127, etc.). ..

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, various processes necessary for determining the internal winning combination are performed based on the internal lottery table according to the current game state and the random value for the internal lottery. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a game start state control process (S6). In this process, for various game states, when the game is started, if the transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on the determined internal winning combination, etc.), the game state is shifted according to the established transition condition. Or, perform various processes necessary for managing the game period of the current game state. The details of the game start state control process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a start command generation / storage process (S7). In this process, start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see S204 of FIG. 32) described later. The data generation, storage, and transmission methods for other commands are basically the same.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs the main side effect control process at the start of the game (S8). In this process, when various effects are performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) when the game is started, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when the lock effect is performed at the start of the game, the execution of the lock effect is controlled. Further, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification regarding the pseudo game) is controlled. Further, for example, when the information of the stop operation is notified by the instruction monitor in the AT state, the notification mode is controlled. Further, although details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation / storage process is performed in this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S9). In this process, various information necessary for stop control such as the type of stop table used in this game and the type of pull-in priority table is set based on the internal winning combination, the game state, and the like.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel rotation start process (S10). This process requires the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all the reels is requested, the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled by the reel control process (see S203 in FIG. 32) described later, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R The rotation is started. Each reel that has started rotation is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained. Further, although details are omitted, in this process, a reel rotation start command generation / storage process is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S11). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) of the rotating reel (in this case, all reels), the attraction priority is set by referring to the set internal winning combination and the set attraction priority table. The indicated data is acquired and stored in the pull-in priority data storage area (not shown). Although not shown, the symbol code storage process described later is performed prior to this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop control process (S12). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop controls set accordingly) and the stop operation modes of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R. Perform various processing necessary for this. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation determination process (S13). In this process, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line is any combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table. For example, it is determined whether or not there is a bit in which "1" is stored in the winning operation flag storage area. Further, although details are omitted, in this process, a winning operation command generation / storage process is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a medal payout / replay operation process (S14). In this process, if the combination of symbols determined in the above-mentioned winning operation determination process is a combination of symbols related to a small winning combination, the corresponding number of medals is paid out, and if it is a combination of symbols related to a replay combination, the next time. In the game, various processes necessary for operating the re-game are performed. For example, when the combination of symbols determined in the above-mentioned winning operation determination process is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, a value equal to the number of bets in this game is set in the automatic insertion medal counter described later. Perform the processing to be performed. Further, in this process, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a state control process at the end of the game (S15). In this process, for various game states, when the transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on the combination of displayed symbols) when the game is completed, the game state is shifted according to the established transition condition. Or, perform various processes necessary for managing the game period of the current game state. The details of the state control process at the end of the game will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs the main side effect control process at the end of the game (S16). In this process, when various effects are performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) at the end of the game, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when the lock effect is performed at the end of the game, the execution of the lock effect is controlled. Further, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification regarding the pseudo game) is controlled. Further, although details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation / storage process is performed in this process.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, one unit game is controlled by performing the above-mentioned processes S2 to S16, and the progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. It should be noted that, if necessary, it is possible to configure so that processes other than these processes are appropriately performed, and it is also possible to configure so that some of these processes are not performed. That is, the above-mentioned various processes are merely examples.

(Processing when power is turned on)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 24, the power-on processing performed in S2 of the above-mentioned main processing will be described. Note that FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for processing when the power is turned on.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a write test of the main RAM 103 after performing an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (not shown), and determines whether or not the write to the main RAM 103 is normally performed as a result of the test (as a result of the test). S21). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has been normally performed (YES in S21), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 52 is in the ON state (S22). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting can be changed.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 52 is in the ON state (YES in S22), the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the time of changing the setting (S23). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area in which data needs to be deleted when the settings of the carry-over combination storage area, the game state flag storage area, the mode flag storage area, and the like are changed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization command generation / storage process (S24). In this process, the data of the initialization command indicating that the setting change process to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 has been started is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (S25). In this process, by accepting the above-mentioned setting value determination operation and setting value confirmation operation, after the main RAM 103 is initialized, a new setting value is set (stored) in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. Will be done. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 52 is in the off state (S26). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the state in which the setting can be changed has ended after the setting value is newly set.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 52 is not in the off state (NO in S26), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until the setting key type switch 52 is in the off state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting key type switch 52 is in the off state (YES in S26), the initialization command generation / storage process is performed (S27). In this process, the data of the initialization command indicating that the setting change process to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is completed is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area. Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the setting key type switch 52 is not in the ON state (NO in S22), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup data is normal (S28). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the various information backed up when the power supply to the pachi-slot machine 1 is cut off (at the time of the power cutoff) is normal.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the backup data is normal (YES in S28), the main CPU 101 performs a game return process (S29). In this process, the pachi-slot machine 1 is restored to the state before the power failure. Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S21 that the writing to the main RAM 103 has not been performed normally (S21 is NO), and in S28, when it determines that the backup data is not normal (S28 is NO), an error at power-on Process (S30). It should be noted that the error generated by this power-on error processing is not resolved by the above-mentioned reset operation, but is resolved according to the newly set value. Therefore, the main CPU 101 is normal until the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned off once after the error processing at the time of power-on, and then a new set value is set (until the above-mentioned processes S22 to S26 are performed). It does not shift to the process (S2 or later in FIG. 23).

(Medal reception / start check processing)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 25, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of medal reception / start check processing.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (S41). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the replay combination has been won (whether the replay has been activated) in the previous unit game.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (S41 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs automatic insertion processing (S42). In this process, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted. Further, although details are omitted, when automatic insertion is performed, a medal insertion command generation / storage process is performed in this process. Further, in this process, the medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal plate 55.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S41 that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (YES in S41), and after the processing in S42, the medal auxiliary storage switch check processing is performed (S43). In this process, it is determined whether or not the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is in the ON state (that is, whether or not a certain number or more of medals are stored in the medal auxiliary storage 33), and the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is pressed. If it is determined that it is in the ON state, a medal auxiliary storage error is generated. In this case, the process waits until the error is resolved. If it is determined that the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is not in the ON state, this process ends.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion status check process (S44). In this process, the current number of bets and credits is checked, and it is also determined whether medals are prohibited or a selector error has occurred. If medals can be accepted, the medals will be accepted. Make it possible to accept (a state where betting operations can be accepted) (allow medal acceptance). If a selector error has occurred, the process waits until the error is resolved.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal can be accepted (S45). When the main CPU 101 determines that the medal can be accepted (YES in S45), the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion check process (S46). In this process, the number of bets and the number of credits are updated based on the detection result of the medal sensor 31S and the detection result of the bet switch 6S. Further, although details are omitted, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command generation / storage process is performed in this process. Further, in this process, the medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal plate 55.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a medal can be inserted or credited (S47). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is not "50". When the main CPU 101 determines that medals cannot be inserted or credits can be inserted (that is, the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is also "50") (S49 is NO). , The acceptance of medals is prohibited (S48). That is, the main CPU 101 is in a state in which medals cannot be accepted (a state in which betting operations cannot be accepted).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S45 that the medal cannot be accepted (S45 is NO), in S47 it determines that the medal can be inserted or credited (S47 is YES), and After the process of S48, it is determined whether or not the number of inserted cards is the number of cards that can start the game (S49). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the current number of bets is "2" or "3".

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of input sheets is the number of sheets that can start the game (YES in S49), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 7S is in the ON state (S50). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start operation has been performed by the player.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 7S is in the ON state (YES in S50), the main CPU 101 prohibits the acceptance of medals (S51). Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the medal acceptance / start check process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the number of input sheets is not the number of sheets that can start the game (S49 is NO), and in S50, when it is determined that the start switch 7S is not in the ON state (S50 is NO), processing is performed. Is returned to S44.

(Internal lottery processing)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 26, the internal lottery process performed in S5 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a set value / medal insertion number check process (S61). In this process, the set value and the number of bets in this unit game are checked. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 sets an internal lottery table according to the set value, the number of bets, the game state, and the like (S62). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 acquires an internal lottery random number value from the random number value storage area (S63). That is, the main CPU 101 acquires the data of the random number value for internal lottery acquired in S4 of the above-mentioned main process. In this process, if it is determined that the set value is other than "1" to "6" or the number of bets is other than "1" to "3", the main CPU 101 causes a serious error. Therefore, the above-mentioned power-on error processing (see S30 in FIG. 24) is executed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an internal winning combination determination process (S64). In this process, the acquired random number value for internal lottery is sequentially updated (for example, addition update) using the lottery value of each internal winning combination specified in the set internal lottery table, and the update result becomes a predetermined result. It is determined whether or not it has overflowed (for example, whether it has overflowed). When a predetermined result is obtained, the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination of this unit game. If the predetermined result is not obtained even if all the internal winning combinations are judged, the result of this unit game is "missing" ("missing" is determined as the internal winning combination).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the internal winning combination has been determined (S65). When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has not been determined (S65 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S64. That is, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the internal winning combination to be determined (the random number value for internal lottery is also sequentially updated), and until the determination is made for all the internal winning combination (or the internal winning combination is in the middle of the determination). The process of S64 is repeated (until it is determined).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has been determined (YES in S65), is the determined internal winning combination a non-carry-over target combination (that is, a small combination or replay instead of a bonus combination that is a carry-over combination)? Whether or not it is a role) is determined (S66). When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is a carry-over non-target combination (YES in S66), the main CPU 101 updates the winning flag storage area (S67). In this process, the data in the winning flag storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, in the winning flag storage area, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data corresponding to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed corresponding to the determined internal winning combination.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S66 that the determined internal winning combination is not a carry-over non-target combination (S66 is NO), and after the processing of S67, is the determined internal winning combination a carry-over target combination? That is, it is determined whether or not it is a carry-over combination (whether it is a bonus combination) (S68).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is the carry-over target combination (YES in S68), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data in the carry-over combination storage area is “0” (S69). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not any of the bonus combinations has been carried over yet. When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carry-over combination storage area is "0" (YES in S69), the main CPU 101 updates the carry-over combination storage area (S70). In this process, the data in the carry-over combination storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, in the carry-over combination storage area, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data corresponding to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed corresponding to the determined internal winning combination.

In S68, the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is not a carry-over target combination (S68 is NO), and in S69, determines that the data in the carry-over combination storage area is not "0" (S69 is NO). ), And after the processing of S70, it is determined again whether or not the data in the carry-over combination storage area is “0” (S71).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carry-over combination storage area is not "0" (NO in S71), the main CPU 101 updates the winning flag storage area (S72). In this process, the data stored in the carry-over combination storage area is reflected in the data in the winning flag storage area. That is, when the bonus combination is carried over (or won in the unit game this time), the main CPU 101 has data corresponding to the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed corresponding to the bonus combination in the winning flag storage area. Store "1" in the bit.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S71 that the data in the carry-over combination storage area is "0" (YES in S71), and after the processing in S72, the main CPU 101 performs a subflag setting process (S73). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a non-advantageous section sub-flag and an advantageous section winning sub-flag are set based on the internal winning combination. In this process, for example, in the AT state, information or the like corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor may be set. Then, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery process after this process.

(State control process at the start of the game)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 27, the game start state control process performed in S6 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the state control process at the start of the game.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition establishment check process (S81). In this process, when the game is started, it is checked whether or not the transition condition for shifting from any game state to any game state is satisfied. For example, when shifting between flags as a predetermined RT state based on winning a predetermined bonus combination, it is checked whether or not the predetermined bonus combination has been won in this process. In the case of the first gaming machine, since the flags are not configured as the RT state (that is, as the gaming state stored in the gaming state flag storage area), the check here is unnecessary. Further, for example, when there is a specific RT state that starts or ends by playing a specific number of games from the establishment of a specific transition condition, this specific number of games can be managed in this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is satisfied (S82). When the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for shifting to any of the gaming states is satisfied (YES in S82), the main CPU 101 updates the game state flag storage area (S83). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state according to the established transition condition. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S84). In this process, it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state or the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process according to the transition of the game state. In this case, such a setting process is appropriately performed.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S82 that the transition condition for shifting to one of the gaming states is not satisfied (S82 is NO), and after the processing of S84, the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether or not there is (S85). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game section is a non-advantageous section (YES in S85), the main CPU 101 performs an advantageous section start condition establishment check process (S86). In this process, when the game is started, it is checked whether or not the transition condition (start condition of the advantageous section) for shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section is satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and it is checked whether or not the lottery result starts the advantageous section.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (S87). When the main CPU 101 determines that the start condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (NO in S87), the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when it is determined that the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S87), the main CPU 101 performs the setting process at the start of the advantageous section (S88). That is, the main CPU 101 starts (sets) the advantageous section. In this process, for example, counting of various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processes is started (that is, monitoring of the game period of a series of advantageous sections is started) in response to the start of the advantageous section. The setting process of is performed as appropriate.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S89). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the started advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a shift destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned advantageous section shift lottery is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S90). In this process, the game period (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode is set according to the set mode, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. When necessary, such a setting process is appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, according to the set transition destination mode, when shifting to the pseudo bonus, "55 games" is set as the gaming period, and the game shifts to the end mode. In that case, "32 games" is set as the game period, and when shifting to other modes, the number of ceiling games corresponding to each is set. In addition, a lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery (see FIGS. 7 and 8 and the like) is set. Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S85 that the current gaming section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (S85 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a game start processing during the advantageous section (S91). The details of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an advantageous section end condition establishment check process (S92). In this process, when the game is started, it is checked whether or not the transition condition (end condition of the advantageous section) for shifting from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section is satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, whether the operating conditions of various limit processes are satisfied based on the number of games in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), or when the current mode is the end mode. It is checked whether or not 32 games have passed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (S93). When it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S93), the main CPU 101 performs the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section (S94). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets the non-advantageous section. In this process, depending on the end of the advantageous section, for example, various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), a mode (game state) in the advantageous section, and a game period (number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode. Initialization processing is performed to clear all the information related to (including) etc. (that is, the information related to the advantageous section). Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (NO in S93), the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

(Processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 28, the game start processing during the advantageous section performed in S91 of the game start state control process described above will be described. Note that FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processes (at the start of the game) (S101). In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes based on the number of games in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), various counters for managing the game period such as various modes (game state) in the advantageous section, or others. Various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, subtraction (addition) by 1 for each game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the specific mode (AT state) (S102). When it is determined that the main CPU 101 is in the specific mode (YES in S102), the main CPU 101 performs AT period management processing (at the start of the game) (S103). In this process, for example, when it is possible to extend the game period in the AT state (for example, extension of the number of games, addition of the number of sets, etc.) at the start of the game, whether or not the execution condition of such extension is satisfied. Is determined, and the game period is extended based on the determination result (if the game period in the AT state can be shortened, the process related to the shortening is performed). Further, in this process, the game period in the AT state may be managed regardless of whether or not it is extended, or the game period in the AT state is managed in the above-mentioned process of S101, and in this process, only the process related to the extension is managed. May be done. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery is performed based on the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, the 1G continuous lottery is performed, and the pseudo bonus is extended according to the lottery result. Processing is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a navigation setting process (S104). In this process, information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor, information corresponding to the stop operation information included in the start command, and the like are set. In this process, it may be possible to determine whether or not to generate navigation. That is, when the notification target combination wins in the AT state, the navigation may not necessarily occur, and in this process, whether or not the navigation can be generated is determined by a predetermined condition (for example, the type of the notification target combination or a predetermined navigation). It may be determined according to the probability of occurrence).

The main CPU 101 determines in S102 whether or not the mode transition condition is satisfied when it is determined that the specific mode is not in progress (S102 is NO) and after S104 (S105). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the transition destination mode is determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (YES in S105), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S106). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) in the shifted advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S107). In this process, the game period (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode is set according to the set mode, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. When necessary, such a setting process is appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the same process as the above-mentioned process of S90 is performed. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (NO in S105), the main CPU 101 ends the game start processing during the advantageous section.

The game start state control process shown in FIG. 27, the game end state control process shown in FIG. 30, the game start process in the advantageous section shown in FIG. 28, and the game end process in the advantageous section shown in FIG. 31 are performed. The processing configuration is basically the same. This is a process that may be performed at either the start of the game or the end of the game (for example, a process of referring to a determined internal winning combination such as a game state or a mode transition). It means that the processing result may be reflected until the end of this game (or until the next game is started), etc.), which means that either one may be performed, and both are the same. It does not mean that the processing of is performed in duplicate. Therefore, such processing may be performed either when the game is started or when the game is finished.

On the other hand, for those that need to be processed when the game is started (for example, the above-mentioned navigation setting process, etc.), it is assumed that the processing is performed when the game is started, and when the game is finished. For those that need to be processed (for example, a process that refers to a combination of displayed symbols), it may be performed when the game is completed. Further, for example, those that need to be processed at a predetermined time before the end of the game after the start of the game, or those that should be processed (for example, a process that refers to the stop operation mode of the first stop operation, etc.) ) May be performed at that time.

(Reel stop control processing)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 29, the reel stop control process performed in S12 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the rotation speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute) (that is, whether the reels are rotating at a constant speed) (S111). When the main CPU 101 determines that all the reels are not rotating at a constant speed (NO in S111), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until all the reels rotate at a constant speed. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the reels are rotating at a constant speed (YES in S111), the stop of each reel is permitted (S112). That is, the main CPU 101 activates each stop button. Further, the operation stop button storage area is updated accordingly (in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, "1" is stored in bits 4 to 6 of the operation stop button storage area).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been operated (S113). When the main CPU 101 determines that the valid stop button has not been operated (NO in S113), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until the valid stop button is operated. When performing automatic stop control, it is possible to measure this standby time and configure the automatic stop control to be performed when the measurement result reaches a predetermined time.

When the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been operated (YES in S113), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area and the push-button storage area (S114). In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, when the first stop operation is performed on the reel 3L (when the stop button 8L is pressed), in this process, the bit of the operation stop button storage area is used. "1" is stored in 0, and bit 4 is updated to "0". Further, the bits 2 to 5 of the pressing order storage area are updated to "0".

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be controlled from the operation stop button (S115). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the reel 3L is determined as the control target reel.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position from the symbol counter (S116). The symbol counter is configured as a counter for grasping symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19"). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the symbol position data in the middle region of the reel 3L when the stop button 8L is pressed is stored as the stop start position.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S117). In this process, for example, the most appropriate number of sliding pieces (movement amount of the symbol) is determined by referring to the number of sliding pieces defined in the above-mentioned stop table, the data of the above-mentioned attraction priority data storage area, and the like.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 stores the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces (S118). In this process, the stop start position stored in the process of S116 described above and the symbol position data of the position where the symbol finally stops from the number of sliding pieces determined in the process of S117 described above are stored as the scheduled stop positions. ..

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop command generation / storage process (S119). In this process, the data of the reel stop command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The reel stop command can be configured to include not only the planned stop position but also a parameter that can specify the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol code storage process (S120). In this process, the symbol code storage area is updated with reference to the symbol type (symbol code) of the scheduled stop position on the reel for which the scheduled stop position has already been determined. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a valid stop button (S121). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there are reels that are still rotating (whether or not the stop operation is performed on all the reels).

When the main CPU 101 determines that there is a valid stop button (YES in S121), the main CPU 101 performs a control change process (S122). In this process, for example, when it is necessary to change the stop table, the pull-in priority table, etc. set in the above-mentioned reel stop initial setting process according to the player's stop operation mode so far, such processing is performed. Reset various information required for stop control.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S123). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) of the rotating reel, the set internal winning combination is set with reference to the symbol type of the scheduled stop position on the reel whose scheduled stop position has already been determined. The data indicating the pull-in priority is acquired by referring to the pull-in priority table and stored in the pull-in priority data storage area. Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 returns the process to S113. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no valid stop button (NO in S121), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process.

(State control processing at the end of the game)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 30, the game end state state control process performed in S15 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the state control process at the end of the game.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition establishment check process (S131). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether or not the transition condition for shifting from any game state to any game state is satisfied. For example, when shifting to a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state based on the display of a predetermined symbol combination, it is checked whether or not the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in this process. Further, in the case of a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state, it is checked whether or not the end conditions of these game states are satisfied in this process. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is checked whether or not a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, it is checked whether or not the end conditions of these gaming states are satisfied by paying out the medals.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transition condition for transitioning to any of the gaming states is satisfied (S132). When the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for shifting to any of the gaming states is satisfied (YES in S132), the main CPU 101 updates the game state flag storage area (S133). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state according to the established transition condition. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, when a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed, "1" is stored in bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area, and 2BB. Set the state or 3BB state. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, when the end conditions of these gaming states are satisfied, bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area is updated to "0".

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S134). In this process, it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state or the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process according to the transition of the game state. In this case, such a setting process is appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if the 2BB state is set, the number of payouts as the end condition is set to "1", and the 3BB state is set. If so, "176" is set for the number of payouts as the end condition.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the transition condition for shifting to one of the gaming states is not satisfied (S132 is NO), and after the processing of S134, the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether or not there is (S135). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section (YES in S135), the main CPU 101 performs an advantageous section start condition establishment check process (S136). As described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is the same as the process of S86 described above (state control process at the start of the game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (S137). When it is determined that the start condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (S137 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S137), the main CPU 101 performs the setting process at the start of the advantageous section (S138). As described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is the same as the process of S88 described above (state control process at the start of the game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S139). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the started advantageous section. As described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is the same as the process of S89 described above (state control process at the start of the game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S140). In this process, the game period (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode is set according to the set mode, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. When necessary, such a setting process is appropriately performed. As described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is the same as the process of S90 described above (state control process at the start of the game).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S135 that the current game section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (S135 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a game end processing during the advantageous section (S141). The details of the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an advantageous section end condition establishment check process (S142). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether or not the transition condition (end condition of the advantageous section) for shifting from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section is satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, whether the operating conditions of various limit processes are satisfied based on the number of payouts in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), or when the current mode is the end mode. It is checked whether or not 32 games have passed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (S143). When the main CPU 101 determines that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S143), the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the end of the advantageous section (S144). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets the non-advantageous section. In this process, depending on the end of the advantageous section, for example, various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), a mode (game state) in the advantageous section, and a game period (number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode. Initialization processing is performed to clear all the information related to (including) etc. (that is, the information related to the advantageous section). Then, after this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (NO in S143), the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process.

(Processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 31, the game end time processing during the advantageous section performed in S141 of the game end state state control process described above will be described. Note that FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processes (at the end of the game) (S151). In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes based on the number of payouts in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), various counters for managing the game period such as various modes (game state) in the advantageous section, or others. Various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, the number of payouts, the number of times a predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the stop operation mode, etc.).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the specific mode (AT state) (S152). When it is determined that the main CPU 101 is in the specific mode (YES in S152), the main CPU 101 performs AT period management processing (at the end of the game) (S153). In this process, for example, when it is possible to extend the game period in the AT state (for example, extension of the number of games, addition of the number of sets, etc.) at the end of the game, whether or not the execution condition of such extension is satisfied. Is determined, and the game period is extended based on the determination result (if the game period in the AT state can be shortened, the process related to the shortening is performed). Further, in this process, the game period in the AT state may be managed regardless of whether or not it is extended, or the game period in the AT state is managed in the above-mentioned process S151, and in this process, only the process related to the extension is managed. May be done. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery is performed based on the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, and a process for extending the pseudo bonus is performed according to the lottery result.

When it is determined that the main CPU 101 is not in the specific mode (NO in S152), and after S153, it is determined whether or not the mode transition condition is satisfied (S154). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the transition destination mode is determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (YES in S154), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S155). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) in the shifted advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned mode transition lottery based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set mode (S156). In this process, the game period (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) of the mode is set according to the set mode, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. When necessary, such a setting process is appropriately performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the same process as the above-mentioned process of S140 is performed. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section. Further, when it is determined that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (S154 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end processing during the advantageous section.

[6-2. Periodic interrupt processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 32, the periodic interrupt process executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the periodic interrupt process.

Here, in the present embodiment, the periodic interrupt processing cycle (1 interrupt time) is set to "1.1172 ms". However, the cycle of the periodic interrupt processing is not limited to this. For example, the periodic interrupt process may be executed at a cycle different from this, or even if the same cycle is set, the interrupt process is actually performed for a part or all of the process. By setting the number of interrupts to "2" or more, the periodic interrupt process may be executed at a cycle different from this as a result.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S201). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an input port check process (S202). In this process, the input state (on state or off state) of various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) is checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt is compared with the input state at the time of the current interrupt, and it is checked whether or not there is a change in the input state. If there is a change in the input state, the input of the main RAM 103 is performed. The change is stored in the port storage area 0 (not shown), and the input state not related to the change is directly stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a reel control process (S203). In this process, the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled, and the rotation and stop of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R are controlled. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data transmission process (S204). In this process, each parameter of each command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. In this process, when the command data is not stored in the communication data storage area, the data stored in the input port storage area 0 and the input port storage area 1 is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 as an input state command.

In the present embodiment, various command data are temporarily stored in the communication data storage area and then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 in the periodic interrupt process. For example, various command data are stored in the communication data storage area. Instead of storing the data, the data may be directly stored in a communication circuit (not shown) provided in the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. Further, in the present embodiment, although detailed description is omitted, various command data are transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by serial communication. For example, various command data are transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by parallel communication. It may be configured to be transmitted to.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment LED drive process (S205). In this process, the display contents of the information display device 14 and the like connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are controlled. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process (S206). In this process, various timers managed by the main control circuit 100 are updated.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs an error detection process (S207). In this process, it is detected whether or not various error states have occurred based on the input state and the like checked in S202 described above. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a door open / close check process (S208). In this process, for example, the lower door mechanism DD open / close state is checked based on the input state of the door open / close monitoring switch 56. When various error states have occurred and the input state of the door open / close monitoring switch 56 is in the open state (off state), a security signal is output from the external centralized terminal plate 55.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a register reset process (S209). Then, the main CPU 101 ends the periodic interrupt process after this process.

[7. Processing by sub-control circuit]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 33, an outline of the sub-side control process executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 using each program will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of an outline of the sub-side control process.

In the pachislot machine 1, various restrictions are provided on the main control circuit 100 side (including the main control board 71 and the main control board case) from the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications, but the sub control circuit The 200 side (including the sub-control board 72 and the sub-control board case) is not so restricted. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 (and the sub-control circuit 200) varies depending on the type and number of connected effect devices, the type of effect performed by the effect device, and the manufacturing cost. It is possible to use the configuration. That is why it is referred to as "outline" in FIG. 33.

First, when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 201 performs the power-on processing (S301 and S302) in the same manner as the main CPU 101. In this process, various tasks necessary for detecting whether or not an abnormality has occurred when the power is turned on, initializing the data stored in the sub RAM 203, and performing various effect execution control processes described later. Processing such as starting up is performed.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 receives the command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub CPU 201 performs the effect execution control process at the time of receiving the command (S303 and S304). In this process, for example, when an initialization command is received, the parameter information of the received initialization command is referred to, and if the setting is changed, the initialization process is appropriately executed on the sub side as well, and the setting must be changed. For example, the sub side also executes the process of returning to the state before the power failure.

In addition, for example, when a start command is received, the parameter information of the received start command is referred to, and if it is in a non-AT state, the content of the effect of suggesting or notifying the internal winning combination, the game state, etc. (if necessary). It is decided (by lottery), and various production devices are controlled so that the production of the determined content is executed. Further, in the AT state, in addition to this, the content of the effect of notifying the advantageous stop operation mode is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed.

Further, for example, when a lock command is received, the content of the effect linked to the content of the lock effect is determined by referring to the parameter information of the received lock command, and various effects are executed so that the effect of the determined content is executed. Control the device. In addition, for example, when a reel stop command is received, the parameter information of the received reel stop command is referred to, and it is linked with the stop start position and the scheduled stop position (or simply the number of stop operations performed, etc.). The content of the effect is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect of the determined content is executed. In addition, for example, when a winning operation command is received, the parameter information of the received winning operation command is referred to, and when a privilege is given, the content of the effect linked to the given privilege is determined, and the determined content is determined. Control various production devices so that the production of

Further, the sub CPU 201 is connected to the sub control board 72 (including those connected via the sub relay board 74), for example, when the effect buttons 10a and 10b are operated, the effect is executed when the effect button is operated. Control processing is performed (S305 and S306). In this process, for example, when the effect button according to the effect is operated during the execution of the operation-linked effect, various effect devices are controlled so that the content of the operation-linked effect changes. Further, for example, when the effect button is operated for calling the user menu described later during non-game, control for displaying the user menu is performed. In addition, when the effect button is operated for the selection / decision operation while the user menu is displayed, the control is performed according to these operations.

Further, when an opportunity other than the above-mentioned opportunity is established, the sub CPU 201 performs other effect execution control processing (S307). In this process, for example, when the non-operation period during which the operation related to the game and the operation related to the user menu are not performed becomes a predetermined period (for example, about 30 seconds), the content of the effect related to the demo state notification is determined and determined. Various production devices are controlled so that the production of the desired content is executed.

[8. Other features of pachislot machines]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes various functions for controlling the game, various functions for controlling the effect, and various configurations for realizing these functions. It can also have a function. In the following, an example of other functions on the player side and an example of other functions on the game store side will be described.

[8-1. Player side]
For example, when a user menu is displayed by a player's directing operation, a desired menu is selected in the user menu, and an appropriate selection / determination operation is performed for the selected menu, the player obtains various information. , It is possible to make various settings.

For example, when the "arrangement / payout table" is selected / determined, the game information indicating the symbol arrangement in the pachislot machine 1, the specified symbol combination, and the payout (contents of the privilege) at the time of winning can be confirmed. The information screen is displayed on the effect display unit.

Further, for example, when "volume / light amount adjustment" is selected / determined, the brightness of various display devices in the pachislot machine 1, the volume of sound output from the speaker group, the light amount of the lamp / LED group, etc. are set. The possible setting screen is displayed on the effect display unit. At the time of such a setting, in order to enable more detailed setting or to accept operations related to the setting more easily, various operation units that accept the game operation of the player are set. It shall be possible to use it as a part of the operation unit (that is, the operation unit that accepts the effect operation) that receives the operation related to.

Further, for example, when "custom" is selected / determined, the effect mode in the pachislot machine 1 (for example, the type of character used for the effect (the type of the character (display mode) itself, the sound corresponding to the character). (Including the type of costume or item (individual display mode) related to the character), the probability of occurrence of the effect (including the type of expectation when the effect occurs), or the mode of suggestion or notification (effect execution timing). Etc.), etc.) can be set. A setting screen is displayed on the effect display unit. At the time of such a setting, in order to enable more detailed setting or to accept operations related to the setting more easily, various operation units that accept the game operation of the player are set. It shall be possible to use it as a part of the operation unit (that is, the operation unit that accepts the effect operation) that receives the operation related to.

Further, for example, when "Unimemo" is selected / determined, it is possible to receive an information providing service using a player's mobile terminal (for example, a mobile phone, a smartphone, etc.). In such an information providing service, for example, a player logs in to start a game (may be a case where the game is started without a login operation), and a logout operation is performed at the end of the game to perform game history information (for example,). , Information according to the results of various games, such as how many games have been played in total, how many times advantageous game states have been generated, and how many cards have been acquired at the maximum) can be confirmed or acquired.

Further, for example, the game history information includes information indicating the type of character that can be displayed during the game and the type of music that can be output according to the result of the game (establishment of the opening condition), and the player's information. It also includes information on incidental benefits such as information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed on the mobile terminal and the types of music that can be output.

Various methods can be adopted as the login / logout method in such an information providing service. For example, using the player's terminal, the player may be made to read the two-dimensional code displayed on the effect display unit to log in / log out, or the player may be entered with a password. Or to memorize the password (Specifically, when logging out at the end of the game, instead of the two-dimensional code, a character string of about 4 to 10 digits can be displayed as the password for the next input, and it is displayed. The player can take notes on paper media, take pictures with a mobile terminal, etc., and log in by logging in by logging in before the next game starts (the password obtained in this way can be entered). -Logout may be performed. In addition, these methods can be combined as appropriate so that login / logout can be performed.

[8-2. Amusement store side]
For example, the hall menu is displayed by the setting confirmation operation of the administrator on the game store side (may be the setting change operation or other operation by the administrator on the game store side), and the desired menu is selected in the hall menu. Further, when the selected menu is appropriately selected / determined, the manager of the game store can obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when "time setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which the date and time of the pachislot machine 1 can be set is displayed on the effect display unit. The date and time may be configured to be automatically updated in the above-mentioned sub-side power-on processing (see S302 in FIG. 33), for example.

Further, for example, when "total medal information" is selected / determined, historical information indicating the number of inserted and paid out pachislot machines 1 within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed on the effect display unit. It should be noted that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu.

Further, for example, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected / determined, the number of setting change operations and setting confirmation operations within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) in the pachislot machine 1 is performed. An information screen is displayed on the effect display unit so that the history information indicating the above can be confirmed. Further, for example, when "error information history" is selected / determined, history information indicating an error occurrence date / time and its contents within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) in the pachislot machine 1 is shown. An information screen that enables confirmation of is displayed on the effect display unit.

Further, for example, when "monitoring history" is selected / determined, history information indicating the door opening date / time and the period within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) in the pachislot machine 1 is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed on the effect display unit. Further, for example, when the "warning setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which the mode and frequency of various warning notifications in the pachi-slot machine 1 can be set is displayed on the effect display unit.

Further, for example, when the "power saving mode setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which it is possible to set whether or not to activate the power saving function of the pachislot machine 1 is displayed on the effect display unit. It should be noted that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu. In addition, at the time of such a setting, in order to enable more detailed setting or to accept operations related to the setting more easily, various operation units that accept the game operation of the player are set. It shall be possible to use it as a part of the operation unit (that is, the operation unit that accepts the effect operation) that receives the operation related to.

Further, for example, when the "stop setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which it is possible to set whether or not to activate the stop function in the pachislot machine 1 is displayed on the effect display unit. The stop function is a function that, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, makes the game inoperable until the game store administrator releases (for example, resets) the game. Further, the predetermined operating condition may be satisfied, for example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by executing the above-mentioned limit processing, or a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increasing section, or an advantageous section) may be satisfied. It may be established when any of the sections (including the effect section) is completed. Further, when the stop function is set to the on state, the automatic settlement function described later may be set to the on state in conjunction with this.

Further, for example, when "automatic settlement setting" is selected / determined, a setting screen on which it is possible to set whether or not to activate the automatic settlement function in the pachislot machine 1 is displayed on the effect display unit. The automatic settlement function is a function in which credits are automatically settled (that is, all credited game values are automatically returned) when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied. Further, the predetermined operating condition may be satisfied, for example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by executing the above-mentioned limit processing, or a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increasing section, or an advantageous section) may be satisfied. It may be established when any of the sections (including the effect section) is completed. Further, when the automatic settlement function is set to the on state, the above-mentioned stop function may be set to the on state in conjunction with this.

In addition, when setting the stop function and the automatic settlement function, various operation units that accept the game operation of the player in order to enable more detailed setting or to accept the operation related to the setting more easily. Can be used as a part of an operation unit that accepts an operation related to the setting (that is, an operation unit that accepts an effect operation). However, in this case, it is not desirable to increase the number of operation units that can be unnecessarily accepted. Therefore, only a specific operation unit (for example, a stop button) should be used as a part of the operation unit that accepts the operation related to the setting. May be possible.

[9. Expansion example]
Up to this point, the pachislot machine 1 has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied, but the gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied is not limited to this. For example, it can be applied to so-called "pachinko machines", "slot machines" and the like, and similar effects can be obtained. That is, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to all gaming machines capable of playing a game (controlling a game) according to a player's game operation (operation). Further, the configuration and functions of the gaming machine including the pachislot machine 1 are not limited to those described above, and various changes and expansions are possible. The following is just an example, but such an extended example will be described.

(Medalless pachinko machine)
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a player betting operation (that is, an operation of inserting a hand-held medal into a medal insertion slot 5 and betting, or a credited medal being inserted into a MAX bet button 6a or a 1-bet button). The game is started with the presence of (operation of operating 6b to bet) as one of the start conditions, and when the medal is paid out when the game is completed, the hopper device 32 is driven to drive the medal payout exit 11. Although the form of paying out medals or being credited has been described, the configuration of the pachislot machine 1 is not limited to this.

For example, in all the forms in which a player bets a game value required for a game, a game is played based on the bet, and a privilege is given (for example, a game value is given) based on the result of the game, the present embodiment. The invention according to the above can be applied. That is, not only the form in which medals are physically inserted (hanged) and the medals are paid out by the movement of the player, but also the game value possessed by the player is electromagnetically managed inside the pachislot machine 1 ( Alternatively, even if it is not electromagnetic, it can be applied to a medal-less game that can be played at least in a manner in which the player cannot directly contact the game value). Here, such a pachislot machine 1 is referred to as a "medalless gaming machine". The medalless gaming machine may be referred to as a "managed gaming machine", an "enclosed gaming machine", or the like.

It should be noted that it may be the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) itself that electromagnetically manages the game value possessed by the player, or it is mounted on the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). It may be a game value management device (connected) (hereinafter, such a management device may be described as a "medal number control board"). Hereinafter, an example in which this game value management device is provided will be described.

The game value management device is a device provided in the pachi-slot machine 1 having at least a ROM and an RWM (or RAM), and is a communication device (hereinafter, such a communication device is described as a "connection terminal board". Is connected to an external game value providing device (hereinafter, such a game value providing device may be referred to as a "communication dedicated unit") via bidirectional communication. The game value management device provides the game value necessary for the player to perform the game value lending operation (that is, the game value betting operation) by performing the necessary communication with the external game value providing device. Action to give the game value (that is, action to provide the player with the game value related to the grant when the winning combination related to the granting the game value is won (the winning combination is established)), and these. It is possible to perform an operation such as electromagnetically recording the game value provided by the operation of. The game value providing device may be referred to as a "game value (game medium) handling device", a "game value (game medium) lending device", or a "sandwich".

Further, the external game value providing device is connected to the external ball ejection management device (ball ejection management server), and the game value management device is connected to the external ball ejection management device as a communication device and an external game value. It is configured so that the payout management information can be transmitted via the providing device. Here, the ball ejection management information is composed of various information necessary for the external ball ejection management device to be able to manage the ball ejection. An example of the payout management information will be described later. Further, the external game value providing device and the external ball ejection management device are connected by, for example, an internet line.

Here, the “ball payout” directly means the number of game media paid out, but in the present embodiment, for example, the difference number (net increase number) obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts, etc. How much the benefits are given to the player (for example, how much the player is positive (how much the game store is negative), or how much the player is negative (how much the game store is positive) It is a concept that includes the degree of continuation of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, an AT state, a series of advantageous sections, etc.), or the degree of gambling assumed by a combination thereof.

Further, for example, a possessed game value number display device (not shown) for displaying the possessed game value number is provided on the front side of the pachislot machine 1, and the game value management device is based on the management result of the game value number. The number of game values displayed on the lever possessed game value number display device may be managed. That is, the game value management device may be configured not only to record the total number of game values that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method, but also to control the display of the recording result. .. In this case, the game value management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded game value number to an external game value providing device, and the player can freely transmit the signal. It has a performance that the recorded game value number cannot be reduced except when it is directly operated, and a signal indicating the recorded game value number has a performance that can be transmitted only via a communication device. Is desirable.

The game value management device not only has a function of electromagnetically managing the game value of the player using an external game value providing device, but also the number of game values bet by the physical movement of the player and the pachislot machine 1. It may have a function of managing the number of game values paid out by the physical movement of. That is, it may be possible to manage the actual insertion and withdrawal of medals in the conventional pachislot machine 1. In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 can be controlled by a conventional method or can be controlled by a method such as the above-mentioned medalless gaming machine. Therefore, regardless of the specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1. Even if there is, it can be a common configuration. Further, in this case, the game value management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 31 and the hopper device 32 described above, and these are controlled by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). It is also possible to adopt a method of indirectly controlling by transmitting the control result.

Further, in addition to the above, the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with various operating means necessary for operating the medalless gaming machine, such as a lending operating means and a return (settlement) operating means that can be operated by the player. In addition, the game value providing device includes various devices such as an insertion slot for valuable value such as banknotes, an insertion slot for a recording medium (for example, an IC card), and a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money or the like from a mobile terminal. In addition, various operating means necessary for the operation of the medalless gaming machine, such as a lending operating means and a returning operating means that can be operated by the player, may be provided (all of which are not shown). The insertable recording medium includes not only non-member recording media issued on the day of the game store but also member recording media owned by the members of the game store. The game value recorded on the non-member recording medium is valid only on the day (it becomes invalid after the next day), but the game value recorded on the member recording medium is valid after the next day.

An example of the flow of the game in this case will be described. For example, first, the player deposits valuable value to the game value providing device by either method. The game value providing device subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values according to the operation of the player to any of the lending operation means, and provides the pachi-slot machine 1 with the game value corresponding to the subtracted valuable values. Then, the player plays a game, and when the game value is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, when ending the game after acquiring a predetermined number of game values based on the result of the game, the player operates one of the return operation means. The game value management device transmits the number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the operation of the player to any of the return operation means. The game value providing device discharges a recording medium on which the transmitted game value number is recorded. The game value management device clears the game value number stored by itself when the game value number is transmitted. The player can take the discharged recording medium to a prize exchange or the like in order to exchange it for a prize, and the discharged recording medium can be used as a game value providing device corresponding to another pachislot machine 1. By inserting it, you can move the table and continue the game. Further, if the discharged recording medium is a member recording medium, the game can be stopped here because it is valid from the next day onward.

In the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation. However, depending on the mode of the player's return operation, the game It may be configured so that only the number of game values desired by the person can be transmitted. That is, the game value held by the player may be divided. Further, the game value providing device is supposed to record the transmitted game value number on a recording medium and discharge it, but the same value is given to the player's mobile terminal by using the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna or the like. Information may be transmitted, and cash or cash equivalents may be discharged, for example, as long as they provide the player with equivalent value.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 or the game value providing device, a lock operating means that can be operated by the player is provided, and communication between the game value management device and the game value providing device cannot be performed according to the operation of the lock operating means. It may be possible to control the state (locked state). In this case, in the pachislot machine 1 or the game value providing device, for example, setting a password (and inputting the set password), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication. The lock state may be released when the result of the authentication process is normal.

According to the medalless gaming machine described so far, as compared with the case where the gaming medium is physically used for the game, for example, a part of the external structure such as the medal insertion slot 5 and the medal payout outlet 11, or the selector 31 or the selector 31 Since it is not necessary to provide some internal structures of the hopper device 32 and the like, not only the cost and manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced, but also the power consumption of the gaming machine can be reduced. In addition, since it becomes more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the gaming machine. Further, since the player does not come into direct contact with the game medium, the game environment can be improved and noise can be reduced. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

(Configuration example of a medalless pachinko machine)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 34, a configuration example in the case where the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine. In the following, a configuration example in which a medal number control board (game value management device) is provided will be mainly described.

As described above, the medal number control board is connected to the main control board 71 and manages the number of medals (game value number) held by the player. Further, the medal number control board is connected to a communication-dedicated unit (game value providing device) via a connection terminal board (communication device). Further, the medal number control board transmits the ball ejection management information to the ball ejection management device via the connection terminal board and the communication dedicated unit. Further, a medal number control circuit (not shown) is mounted on the medal number control board. Further, the medal number control circuit includes, for example, a medal number control CPU (not shown), a medal number control ROM (not shown), and a medal number control RWM (not shown).

The ball ejection management device is, for example, a server for ball ejection management managed by the union (information center) to which the gaming machine maker belongs, and the transmitted ball ejection management information is stored in the ball ejection management device. Therefore, it is provided for the purpose of making it possible to monitor whether or not the gambling property of each gaming machine is appropriate (ball ejection performance).

Therefore, from this point of view, the medal number control board and the connection terminal board play important functions in the pachi-slot machine 1 like the main control board 71, so that fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications can be prevented. It needs to be provided inside the pachislot machine 1. Configuration Example 1 and Configuration Example 2 shown in FIG. 34 show an example of such an embodiment.

<Structure example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 34 shows that the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case in the same manner as the main control board 71. Here, the main control board case is usually subjected to various sealing treatments to make it difficult to open (or remove) it, or to make it possible to recognize the trace of opening (or the number of times it has been opened). (For example, a seal by caulking or affixing a seal sticker, or affixing a caulking sticker that describes a record of cutting the caulking, etc.).

Therefore, if the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case, the same security effect as that of the main control board 71 can be obtained, and fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications can be appropriately prevented.

<Structure example 2>
In the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 34, the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in a medal number control board case provided separately from the main control board case, unlike the configuration example 1 described above. It shows that there is. The medal number control board case shall be configured as a transparent (or substantially transparent) resin case similar to the main control board case, and the medal number control board and connection terminals housed therein. The board shall be housed in an easily visible state.

Here, the medal number control board case of the configuration example 2 may be configured to be subjected to the same sealing process as the main control board case, or at least a part of the sealing process may be applied. You can also do it. For example, the medal number control board case may be sealed by caulking as in the main control board case, but the seal may not be attached. Further, for example, in the main control board case, it is obligatory to use a predetermined caulking seal, but in the medal number control board case, an arbitrary seal may be used as the caulking seal.

<Example of accumulated data>
The stored data example shown in FIG. 34 shows an example of various data stored in the ball ejection management device. That is, an example of the ball ejection management information transmitted by the medal number control board to the ball ejection management device via the connection terminal board and the communication dedicated unit is shown. It should be noted that this is just an example, and among the various information shown in FIG. 34, a part thereof may not be transmitted, or information other than the various information shown in FIG. 34 may be transmitted. You can also.

Further, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-dedicated unit is arbitrary, and the timing at which the communication-dedicated unit transmits information to the ball ejection management device is also arbitrary. As long as the payout management device can monitor the payout performance of each gaming machine for at least one unit (for example, one business day of a game store), the ball may be transmitted at any timing. .. For example, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-dedicated unit may be different from the timing at which the communication-dedicated unit transmits information to the payout management device. Further, for example, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-dedicated unit may be different depending on the type of information.

The accumulated data "total number of input sheets" is the cumulative number of sheets input per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transfers information on the number of game values bet by the player's betting operation to a communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), except for those bet by the operation of the re-game. The communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time when the game store is closed).

The accumulated data "total number of payouts" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transfers the information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), except for the one given by the operation of the re-game. The communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business of the amusement store).

The accumulated data "MY" is the maximum difference number generated in one unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on (in short, the difference number obtained in the period when the game value is most increased in one unit. (Referred to as "MY"). For example, the medal number control board calculates such a maximum difference number and transmits the calculated information to the communication-dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time when the game store is closed), and the communication-dedicated unit receives the information. Is transmitted to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business of the game store).

The accumulated data "total number of payouts for the game" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and is the cumulative number of payouts paid out during the operation of various game machines. .. For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine during the operation of various accessories at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during operation of various accessories). It is transmitted to the unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time when the game store is closed).

The accumulated data "total number of continuous payouts" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and the continuous bonuses (RB. Included in RB during BB operation). It is the cumulative number of payouts paid out during the operation of. For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine during the operation of the continuous accessory at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during the operation of the continuous accessory). It is transmitted to the unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time when the game store is closed).

Further, the medal number control board transmits various information that can be displayed on the combination ratio monitoring device 54 to the communication-dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of calculation by the combination ratio monitoring device 54). The information is transmitted to the ball ejection management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transmission from the medal number control board). The accumulated data "combined character ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned accessory ratio information, and the accumulated data "continuous accessory ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned continuous accessory ratio information, and the accumulated data "advantageous". The "section ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific section ratio information, and the accumulated data "instructed accessory ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned accessory ratio information to be aggregated / calculated even during the AT state. The accumulated data "state ratio of accessories, etc." corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific section ratio information that is the target of aggregation / calculation even during operation of various accessories.

The accumulated data "number of games" is the cumulative number of games per unit since the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transmits information on the number of games played to the communication-dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), and the communication-dedicated unit accumulates the information at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game). For example, it is transmitted to the payout management device at the time when the game store is closed.

The stored data "main control chip ID number" is an individual identification number (also referred to as "CPUID", which is referred to as "chip ID number") of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this individual identification number when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the ball ejection management device. Information including this individual identification number is transmitted.

The stored data "main control chip maker code" is a maker code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this maker code when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the ball ejection management device. Send information including the manufacturer code.

The stored data "main control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this product code when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the ball ejection management device. Send information including product code.

The accumulated data "medal number control chip ID number" is an individual identification number of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this individual identification number when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the ball ejection management device. Information including this individual identification number is transmitted. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication-dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information is "0".

The accumulated data "medal number control chip maker code" is a maker code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each game machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this maker code when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the ball ejection management device. Send information including the manufacturer code. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication-dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information is "0".

The accumulated data "medal number control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, the medal number control board transmits information including this product code when transmitting various information to the communication-dedicated unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits various information when transmitting various information to the ball ejection management device. Send information including product code. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication-dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information is "0".

In this way, the ball ejection management device can accumulate various types of information (ball ejection management information) transmitted from the gaming machine. In addition, the ball ejection management information includes a plurality of individual identification information (for example, the above-mentioned "main control chip ID number" to "medal number control chip product code") capable of identifying an individual of the gaming machine. Therefore, the payout management device can identify the game machine of the transmission source by these individual identification information, and for example, from a certain time, the "main control chip ID number" and the "medal number control chip ID number" If the correspondence between the two is different, it is possible to recognize the possibility that one of the control boards has been replaced (that is, the possibility of fraudulent activity or unauthorized modification).

In addition, the ball ejection management information includes a plurality of ball ejection information (for example, the above-mentioned "total number of inserted balls" to "number of games") that can identify the ball ejection performance per unit. Therefore, the ball ejection management device can recognize whether or not the gambling property of the source gaming machine is within an appropriate range based on the ball ejection information. For example, if the "total number of payouts" or "ratio of instructed accessories" becomes extremely high from a certain time, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity or modification has been performed, or there is some defect in the specification design in the first place. It is possible to recognize the possibility that there was.

Then, when the above-mentioned possibility is recognized by the ball ejection management device, it can be expected that the game store, the game machine maker, etc. will be notified of the result and appropriate measures will be taken. That is, each is based on a plurality of managed game machines, a game value providing device (communication dedicated unit) that transmits the ball ejection management information transmitted from the managed gaming machine to the ball ejection management device, and the transmitted ball ejection management information. By constructing a management system including a ball ejection management device that manages the ball ejection performance of the managed gaming machines, it is possible to appropriately manage all the managed gaming machines under control.

<Modification example 1>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured so that the number of gaming values held by the player is managed by the medal number control board. Therefore, a medal number monitoring device (not shown) may be provided on the medal number control board so that the manager of the game store can grasp such management status or other information.

The medal number monitoring device is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED and is provided inside the medal number control board case. The medal number monitoring device collects various information (for example, a part or all of the above-mentioned payout management information) regarding the number of game values aggregated and calculated by the medal number control CPU (or may be the main CPU 101). Display sequentially. If the medal number monitoring device displays all the display contents of the combination ratio monitoring device 54, the combination ratio monitoring device 54 may not be provided. Alternatively, the combination ratio monitoring device 54 may be used in combination with the medal number monitoring device.

Further, the medal number monitoring device may be mounted on the medal number control board, or may be mounted on another board (for example, a connection terminal board) connected to the medal number control board. May be good. Further, if it is in the cabinet G, it may be provided in another place. For example, it may be provided on the medal number control board case. Further, a management switch for starting the display on the medal number monitoring device or switching the contents thereof may be provided in the cabinet G so that various information may be displayed when this is operated. Further, on the premise that such a management switch is used, for example, the information display device 14 may be used in combination with the medal number monitoring device.

When various error states related to the medal number monitoring device occur, the medal number monitoring device may display the type of the error state that has occurred. For example, a communication error with the main control board 71 occurs, a communication error with the connection terminal board occurs, a communication error with the game value providing device occurs, or an abnormality occurs in the medal number control RWM. In some cases, the corresponding numerical value may be displayed. In this case, in order to make it easy for the manager of the game store to recognize which error state the displayed numerical value corresponds to, the corresponding relationship is provided in or near the medal number control board case. An explanatory part (sticker sticking, printing, etc.) may be provided.

<Modification 2>
As described above, in the medalless gaming machine, the medal number control board can be configured to transmit the ball ejection management information to the outside via the connection terminal board. Here, in the present embodiment, an external centralized terminal plate 55 is also provided to transmit information to the outside. Therefore, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 can be configured as follows, for example.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as a common terminal board. As a result, not only the number of parts can be reduced, but also the wiring to the outside can be reduced, so that the security effect can be enhanced.

Further, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as one unit. Further, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are arranged in the vicinity at least in the cabinet G. As a result, work efficiency at the time of connection can be improved. Further, the length of the wiring can be made constant, and the wiring location can be limited, so that the security effect can be enhanced.

<Modification example 3>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured to transmit the ball ejection management information to the ball ejection management device. In addition, the ball ejection management device can appropriately manage the ball ejection performance of each medalless gaming machine based on the transmitted ball ejection management information. Therefore, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided on the premise that the ball ejection performance can be appropriately managed in this way. That is, it may not have the function of forcibly terminating the advantageous section based on the establishment of certain regulatory conditions.

Further, the function of appropriately managing the ball ejection performance may be provided on the medal number control board, and the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided on the premise that the ball ejection performance can be appropriately managed in this way. .. That is, it may not have the function of forcibly terminating the advantageous section based on the establishment of certain regulatory conditions.

For example, the medal number control board is configured to include a ball output monitoring RWM (which may be the above-mentioned medal number control RWM or another RWM). For example, the ball ejection monitoring RWM is initialized when the setting is changed, but is not initialized at the end of the advantageous section to monitor the ball ejection. Then, when the monitored ball output exceeds a certain threshold value, for example, the advantageous section itself is not forcibly terminated, but the probability of occurrence of navigation is lowered, the probability of AT state being extended is lowered, or the probability is lowered. Alternatively, it is possible to perform control that lowers the ball ejection performance by terminating the AT state itself. Even in this way, it is possible to appropriately manage the ball ejection performance. In this case, such a control result may be transmitted to the ball ejection management device as the ball ejection management information. That is, both the medal number control board and the ball ejection management device may be configured to be able to manage the ball ejection performance of each medalless gaming machine.

(Configuration example of main control board of pachislot machine)
Subsequently, a configuration example of the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control board 71. In the following, a configuration example of reuse of the main control board 71 will be mainly described.

As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, and one of them is that it is necessary to print the manufacturer name and the board control number on the main control board 71. It has become. The manufacturer name is the name of the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactures the pachislot machine 1, and the control number is a number for specifying the model of the main control board 71.

<Structure example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35 shows that the manufacturer name and the board control number are printed in characters on the main control board 71 as in the conventional case. Here, in the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, it is assumed that the pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “model A”) on which the main control board 71 is mounted is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd. At this time, initially, only the manufacturer name "BB Co., Ltd." and the board control number "BB-00-11-22" in the lower row are printed. After that, when the model A is removed from the amusement shop, for example, when AA Co., Ltd. tries to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as "model B"), the company Co., Ltd. AA deletes the printed lower manufacturer name and substrate control number by laser engraving, and in a different space, the serial number and substrate control number related to the company (for example, the upper manufacturer of configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35). The name "AA Co., Ltd." and the board control number "AA-00-11-22") must be newly printed.

After that, the model B was removed from the amusement store, and for example, BB Co., Ltd. tried to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as "model C"). In this case, BB Co., Ltd. must delete the printed manufacturer name and board control number in the upper row by laser engraving, and newly print the serial number and board control number related to the company in a different space. However, in the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, since there is no free space anymore, the main control board 71 can be reused due to the above-mentioned restrictions, although it can still be sufficiently reused in terms of hardware. There was a problem that it might not be possible.

This is the same even when a plurality of manufacturer names and board control numbers are printed from the beginning. For example, even if the serial number and the board control number related to both AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. are printed in advance, the serial number and the board control number related to AA Co., Ltd. are laser-engraved at the time of manufacturing the model A. This is because it will be deleted. Therefore, although there is a possibility that BB Co., Ltd. can reuse it, AA Co., Ltd. cannot reuse it. On the other hand, the following configuration examples 2 and 3 can be expected to solve the above-mentioned problems. That is, the reusability of a board used for controlling a game, such as the main control board 71, can be improved.

<Structure example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35 shows printing a code including a manufacturer name and a substrate control number. In the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code, is used as an example of a code including a manufacturer name and a board control number, but a JAN code (bar code) and others Code can be used. That is, the code can be any code as long as it includes information that allows the confirmer to uniquely identify the manufacturer name and the board control number by some means (for example, a mobile terminal, etc.). May be good.

In the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, first, assuming that the model A is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., the first code from the right is printed. The first code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, the model A is removed from the game store, and for example, when AA Co., Ltd. tries to manufacture the model B, the second code from the right is printed and the first code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The second code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the substrate control number related to AA Co., Ltd.

After that, the model B is removed from the game store, and for example, when BB Co., Ltd. tries to manufacture the model C, the third code from the right is printed and the second code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The third code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, even when the model C is removed from the game store and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tries to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. is the third from the right. The code of is deleted by laser engraving, the fourth code from the right is printed, and the fourth code from the right contains information that can identify the serial number and board control number related to AA Co., Ltd. For example, the main control board 71 can be reused for a new pachislot machine 1.

That is, in the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, by printing a code including the manufacturer name and the board control number, the manufacturer name and the board control number can be printed (printed) on the surface of the main control board 71. ) Since space can be saved, it is possible to improve the reusability as compared with the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35.

<Structure example 3>
Configuration Example 3 shown in FIG. 35 indicates that a code including the manufacturer name and the substrate control number is printed in the same manner as in Configuration Example 2 described above. In the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of (for example, four) codes are printed from the beginning. For example, it is assumed that two AA parts and two BB parts are printed. Further, on the surface of the main control board 71 (or it may be on the main control board case corresponding thereto), the code is read by caulking the portion corresponding to each code with, for example, a band-shaped member or the like. It is possible to fix it in an impossible state. Further, for example, by cutting a strip-shaped member or the like, it is possible to release the fixing and make the code readable.

In the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, first, assuming that the model A is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., only the first code from the right is readable, and the second to fourth codes from the right are readable. Is considered unreadable. The first code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, model A was removed from the amusement store, and for example, when AA Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture model B, only the second code from the right was made readable, and the first, third, and fourth codes from the right were readable. The second code is considered unreadable. The second code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the substrate control number related to AA Co., Ltd.

After that, model B was removed from the amusement store, and for example, when BB Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture model C, only the third code from the right was made readable, and the first, second, and fourth codes from the right were readable. The second code is considered unreadable. The third code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and the board control number related to BB Co., Ltd. After that, even when the model C is removed from the game store and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tries to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. is the fourth from the right. If only the code of No. 1 is made readable and the first to third codes from the right are made unreadable, the main control board 71 can be reused for a new pachislot machine 1.

Further, in the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, since it is sufficient to make at least one code readable and the other code unreadable, further reuse is possible and more. It is also possible to reuse it at the game machine maker of. In the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, it is also possible to provide only the caulking hole and to print the code at the portion corresponding to the caulking hole each time it is reused.

[10. Second game machine]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 46, another specific example of the specifications relating to the playability of the pachislot machine 1 will be described as a “second game machine”. The difference between the second gaming machine and the first gaming machine will be described.
The second gaming machine is a medalless gaming machine, and the configuration of the pachislot machine 1 is the same as that in FIG. 34.
Further, since the second gaming machine is a game that does not use a medal, which is a gaming medium, the "medal" in the following description is a common name indicating the game value.

[10-1. Main control circuit]
The configuration of the main control circuit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 36.

As shown in FIG. 36, in addition to the main CPU 101, the main ROM 102, and the main RAM 103, the main control circuit 100 includes an external bus interface 104, a clock circuit 105, a reset controller 106, an arithmetic circuit 107, and a random number. It has a circuit 110, a parallel port 111, an interrupt controller 112, a timer circuit 113, a first serial communication circuit 114, and a second serial communication circuit 115. Each of these parts constituting the main control circuit 100 is connected to each other via a signal bus 116.

The external bus interface 104 electrically connects the main control circuit 100 with an external signal bus (not shown) to which various components (for example, reels and the like) provided outside the main control circuit 100 are connected. It is an interface circuit for.

The clock circuit 105 is configured to include, for example, a frequency divider (not shown), and receives a clock pulse signal for CPU operation input from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) to other components (for example, a timer circuit). It is converted into a clock pulse signal of the frequency used in 113).

The clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 is output to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the clock pulse signal output from the clock circuit 105 to perform control related to the overall game operation. The clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 is also output to the reset controller 106.

The reset controller 106 resets the IAT (Illegal Address Trap) and the WDT (watchdog timer) based on the reset signal input from the power supply management circuit 93. The arithmetic circuit 107 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit.

The random number circuit 110 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). Although not shown, the random number circuit 110 has random number registers 0 for obtaining 2-byte hard-latch random numbers, random number registers 1 to 3 for obtaining 2-byte soft-latch random numbers, and 1-byte soft-latch random numbers. It is composed of random number registers 4 to 7 for obtaining. The main CPU 101 extracts one value from the random numbers in a predetermined range generated by the random number circuit 110, for example, as a random number value for internal lottery.

The parallel port 111 is a port (memory map I / O) of signals input / output between the main control circuit 100 and various circuits (for example, power supply management circuit 93, etc.) provided outside the main control circuit 100. Is. The parallel port 111 is also connected to the random number circuit 110 and the interrupt controller 112.

The interrupt controller 112 interrupts processing by the main CPU 101 based on a power failure detection signal input from the power management circuit 93 via the parallel port 111 or a timeout signal input from the timer circuit 113 at a cycle of 1.1172 ms. Controls the execution timing of.

When a power failure detection signal is input from the power management circuit 93, or when a timeout signal is input from the timer circuit 113, the interrupt controller 112 sends an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the main CPU 101. Output to.

The main CPU 101 performs a periodic interrupt process (see FIG. 32) based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 112 in response to a timeout signal from the timer circuit 103.

The timer circuit 113 (PTC) operates with a clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 (a clock pulse signal having a frequency obtained by dividing the clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU by a divider (not shown)) ( Count the elapsed time). The timer circuit 113 outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 112 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec.

The first serial communication circuit 114 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when data (various control commands (commands)) are transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72. The second serial communication circuit 115 is a circuit that controls the serial transmission operation when data is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

When the actual medal is inserted or the MAX bet button 6a is pressed and the start lever 7 (see FIG. 1) is turned on, the first gaming machine extracts the internal lottery random number value, but the second gaming machine , The random value is extracted even when the start lever 7 is kept on.

In the second gaming machine, the detection signal of the MAX bet button 6a (see FIG. 1) is input from the bet switch 6S (see FIG. 3) to the input port PI1 of the parallel port 111. The detection signal of the 1-bet button 6b (see FIG. 1) is input from the bet switch 6S to the input port PI2 of the parallel port 111. The detection signal of the start switch 7S is input to the input port PI3 of the parallel port 111.

In this way, the bet switch 6S constitutes a decision operation detection unit that detects the bet operation, and more specifically, the first decision operation detection unit that detects the operation of the MAX bet button 6a and the operation of the 1 bet button 6b. A second determination operation detection unit for detection is configured.

Further, the main CPU 101 includes a detection signal of the bet switch 6S (detection signal of the MAX bet button 6a, a detection signal of the 1 bet button 6b), a detection signal of the settlement switch 9S (see FIG. 3), and an automatically inserted bet. It constitutes a game value number determination unit that determines the number of bets (game value number) based on the number.

A latch signal is input to the input port PI0 of the parallel port 111 from the latch signal generation circuit shown in FIG. 37. The latch signal generation circuit includes an XOR circuit (first circuit) 140 that exclusively ORs the detection signal of the MAX bet button 6a and the detection signal of the 1-bet button 6b, an output signal of the XOR circuit 140, and a start switch 7S. It is composed of an AND circuit (second circuit) 141 that takes a logical product with the detection signal.

In FIG. 36, in the random number circuit 110, a random number update circuit (not shown) is latched by inputting a latch signal, and a 2-byte hard latch random number is set in the random number register 0. The hard latch random number set in the random number register 0 is acquired as an internal lottery random number value by the main CPU 101 in the random number value acquisition process (see S4 in FIG. 23).

The main CPU 101 determines whether or not the latch signal input to the input port PI0 of the parallel port 111 is effective for the progress of the game based on the level of each signal input to the input ports PI1 to PI3 of the parallel port 111. Is determined.

For example, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the input port P13 (start switch 7S) is in the ON state in order to determine whether or not the latch signal of the input port PI0 is valid by the latch signal generation circuit shown in FIG. 37. If it is on, it is determined whether either the input port P11 (MAX bet button 6a) or the input port P12 (1 bet button 6b) is on, and if either one is on, it is input to the input port PI0. The latch signal is judged to be valid, and if the input port P13 is in the off state, the input port P11 and the input port P12 are in the off state, or the input port P11 and the input port P12 are in the on state, the latch signal of the input port PI0 is invalid. to decide.

When it is determined that the latch signal input to the input port PI0 of the parallel port 111 is valid, the main CPU 101 is in a state where the execution of the internal lottery process (see S5 in FIG. 23) is permitted. In this way, the main CPU 101 constitutes the latch signal determination means.

When it is determined that the latch signal input to the input port PI0 of the parallel port 111 is not valid, the main CPU 101 is not in a state where the execution of the internal lottery process is permitted.

[10-2. Game flow]
The first gaming machine starts the game when the actual medal is inserted or the MAX bet 6a is pressed and the start lever 7 is turned on, but the second gaming machine keeps the start lever 7 on. Start the game even when you are there. Hereinafter, the flow of the game of the second gaming machine will be described with reference to the time charts shown in FIGS. 38 to 41.

[10-2-1. Game flow when the game is started from the state where the start lever is off]
With reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 38, the flow of the game when the game excluding the re-game is started from the state where the start lever 7 is off will be described. In FIG. 38, the horizontal axis represents the passage of time, and the vertical axis represents the operation state of the re-game (re-game in the figure), the detection state of the bet switch 6S (MAXBET in the figure), and the execution of the closing process from the top. State, effective state of start lever 7 (in the figure, acceptance state of the reel rotation device), operation state of the start lever 7 (input state of the reel rotation device in the figure), start of the game (in the figure, rotation of the reel) Operation state of the device), execution period of random value acquisition process (see S4 in FIG. 23, random number acquisition process in the figure), execution period of internal lottery process (see S5 in FIG. 23, in the figure, lottery process), reel rotation. Execution period of processing at the start (see S6 to S11 in FIG. 23, in the figure, rotation processing), execution period of processing at the time of reel stop (see S12 in FIG. 23, in the figure, stop processing), processing after the reel is stopped. (See S13 to S16 and S2 in FIG. 23, in the figure, post-stop processing) is shown.

At time t1, for example, when the MAX bet button 6a is turned on, the input process is started and the maximum bet number (specified number) is set. When the charging process is completed at time t2, the start lever 7 (rotating cylinder rotating device) is activated.

When the start lever 7 is turned on at time t3, the game is started, the start lever 7 is disabled, the random number acquisition process is executed, and then the internal lottery process, the reel rotation start process, the reel stop control process, and the reel The processing after the stop is executed sequentially.

[10-2-2. Game flow when re-game is started from the state where the start lever is off]
With reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 39, the flow of the game when the re-game is started from the state where the start lever 7 is off will be described. The horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 39 are the same as the horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 38.

In the operating state of the re-game, at time t11, the charging process by automatic charging is started, and at time t12, when the charging process is completed, the start lever 7 is activated. When the start lever 7 is turned on at time t13, the game is started, the start lever 7 is disabled, the random number acquisition process is executed, and then the internal lottery process, the reel rotation start process, the reel stop control process, and the reel The processing after the stop is executed sequentially.

[10-2-3. Game flow when the game is started from the state where the start lever is on]
With reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 40, the flow of the game when the game excluding the re-game is started from the state where the start lever 7 is on will be described. The horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 40 are the same as the horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 38.

When the MAX bet button 6a is turned on at time t21 while the start lever 7 is on, the closing process is started and the maximum bet number (specified number) is set. When the closing process is completed at time t22, the start lever 7 is activated.

When the MAX bet button 6a is turned off at time t23, the game is started, the start lever 7 is disabled, the random number acquisition process is executed, and then the internal lottery process, the reel rotation start process, the reel stop control process, The processing after the reel is stopped is sequentially executed.

In FIG. 40, when the 1-bet button 6b is turned on at time t21, the game is not started even if the 1-bet button 6b is turned off at time t23. Similarly, if the number of bets is less than the maximum number at time t21, the game is not started. However, at the start of the game, if the number of bets is 1 and the game can be executed, the game is started when the 1-bet button 6b is turned off.

When the game is not started in this way, if the game is possible with the current number of bets, the start lever 7 is turned off and the game is started when the start lever 7 is turned on again. Further, even if the start lever 7 remains on, the game is started when the number of bets reaches the maximum number of bets by turning on the MAX bet button 6a or turning on the 1-bet button 6b.

Further, if the next game after one game is completed can be executed with less than the maximum number of bets and the start lever 7 is on, the main CPU 101 can be a speaker group connected to the sub-relay board 74. A notification unit such as the main display device 210 connected to the sub-control board 72 is notified of a message prompting the start lever 7 to be turned off.

By notifying in this way, the player is given room to change the number of bets when it is advantageous to play with less than the maximum number of bets and when it is not disadvantageous to play with less than the maximum number of bets. be able to.

[10-2-4. Game flow when re-game is started from the state where the start lever is on]
With reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 41, the flow of the game when the re-game is started from the state where the start lever 7 is on will be described. The horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 41 are the same as the horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 38.

In the state where the start lever 7 is turned on in the re-game activated in the first game, the closing process by automatic closing is started at time t31, and when the closing process is completed at time t32, the start lever 7 is in the effective state. ..

When, for example, the MAX bet button 6a is turned on at time t33 and the MAX bet button 6a is turned off at time t34, the game is started, the start lever 7 is disabled, the random number acquisition process is executed, and then. , Internal lottery processing, reel rotation start processing, reel stop control processing, and processing after reel stop are sequentially executed.

In FIG. 41, when the start lever 7 is in the enabled state, even if the start lever 7 is turned off, the game is started, the start lever 7 is disabled, and the random number acquisition process is executed. After that, the internal lottery process, the reel rotation start process, the reel stop control process, and the process after the reel stop are sequentially executed.

Further, in FIG. 41, when the charging process is completed at time t32, the game is started and the random number acquisition process is executed without the start lever 7 being enabled, and then the internal lottery process and the reel rotation start process are performed. The reel stop control process and the process after the reel stop may be sequentially executed.

[10-3. Confirmation of communication between the main control circuit and the sub control circuit]
As described above, various commands such as an input state command, a winning operation command, a medal insertion (bet) command, a start command, and an initialization command are transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. The input state command includes various data representing the detection state of the MAX bet button 6a, the detection state of the 1-bet button 6b, the detection state of the start switch 7S, and the like.

After receiving the initialization command or the winning operation command, the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 determines whether or not the game is started based on various data included in the medal insertion command and the input state command corresponding to the first command. To judge.

Specifically, it is confirmed by the medal insertion command that the maximum number of bets (specified number) has been reached, and the detection state of the MAX bet button 6a (input port P11) included in the input state command, and the 1-bet button 6b (input port). From the detection state of P12) and the detection state of the start switch 7S (input port P13), the start switch 7S is in the on state and the MAX bet button 6a is changed from the on state to the off state as the start condition of the first game. In this case, when the start switch 7S is on and the 1-bet button 6b changes from the on state to the off state as the start condition of the second game, the MAX bet button 6a and 1 bet are set as the start condition of the third game. When the button 6b is in the off state and the start switch 7S changes from the off state to the on state, it is determined that the game has started.

When the sub CPU 201 does not receive the start command corresponding to the second command even after a certain period of time (for example, a suitable time between 10 msec and 100 msec) has elapsed after determining that the game has started, the main control circuit 100 Performs error processing such as notifying a communication error between the user and the sub-control circuit 200.

The start of the game corresponds to the time t3 in FIG. 38, the time t13 in FIG. 39, the time t23 in FIG. 40, the time t34 in FIG. 41, the time t42 in FIG.

In the communication error processing, the sub CPU 201 causes, for example, output an error message to the speaker group connected to the sub relay board 74, the LED group, the main display device 210 connected to the sub control board 72, and / or the sub display device 220. ..

[10-4. Main processing]
The main process (main operation process) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 42.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection state of the bet switch 6S has changed from off to on. For example, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the on-edge of the MAX bet button 6a is detected.

If it is determined that the detection state of the bet switch 6S has changed from off to on (YES), the process of step S402 is executed. If it is determined that the detection state of the bet switch 6S is not turned on from off (NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S401.

In step S402, the main CPU 101 executes the closing process. The process executed in the insertion process corresponds to the process of steps S41 to S49 of the medal acceptance / start check process shown in FIG. 25. After executing the process of step S402, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S403.

In step S403, the main CPU 101 executes the settlement button check process. In the settlement button check process, the main CPU 101 transmits the number of game values credited to the number of medals control board (“medals” in the first game machine) and the number of game values bet (1 to specified number). At the same time, the number of credits and the number of bets are reset to 0. The medal number control board returns the credited game value number and the bet game value number to the game value providing device (sand).

In the operating state of the re-game, the main CPU 101 skips the settlement button check process. After executing the process of step S403, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S404.

In step S404, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection state of the start switch 7S has changed from off to on. That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the on-edge of the start lever 7 (rotating cylinder rotating device) has been detected.

If it is determined that the detection state of the start switch 7S has changed from off to on (YES), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S407. If it is determined that the detection state of the start switch 7S is not turned on from off (NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S405.

In step S405, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection state of the start switch 7S is ON. That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever 7 is on.

If it is determined that the detection state of the start switch 7S is ON (YES), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S406. If it is determined that the detection state of the start switch 7S is not ON (NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S403.

In step S406, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection state of the bet switch 6S has changed from on to off. For example, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the off-edge of the MAX bet button 6a has been detected.

If it is determined that the detection state of the bet switch 6S has changed from on to off (YES), the process of step S407 is executed. If it is determined that the detection state of the bet switch 6S is not from on to off (NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S403.

In step S407, the main CPU 101 executes a random number acquisition process. The process executed in the random number acquisition process corresponds to the process of step S4 of the main process shown in FIG. 23, except that the random number value for internal lottery is a random number register 0 to 2 as described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. Get a hard-latch random number for a byte. After executing the process of step S407, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S408.

In step S408, the main CPU 101 executes the lottery process. The process executed in the lottery process corresponds to the process of step S5 of the main process shown in FIG. 23. After executing the process of step S408, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S409.

In step S409, the main CPU 101 executes the rotation process. The process executed in the rotation process corresponds to the process of steps S6 to S11 of the main process shown in FIG. 23. After executing the process of step S409, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S410.

In step S410, the main CPU 101 executes the stop process. The process executed in the stop process corresponds to the process of steps S12 to S16 and S2 of the main process shown in FIG. 23. After executing the process of step S410, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S411.

In step S411, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the replay has been activated. If it is determined that the replay has been activated (YES), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S402. If it is determined that the replay has not been activated (NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S401.

[10-5. External structure]
A suitable external structure of the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 43. The second gaming machine may have the external structure shown in FIG.

In FIG. 43, the start lever 7 functions as a palm rest on which the player can place one hand (left hand in the second gaming machine). The start lever 7 is provided on the pedestal portion in a state of being urged upward by an urging member or the like.

The start lever 7 is located at the first position where the pedestal portion and the upper surface are continuous in a no-load state in which nothing is placed, and in a load state such as when the player's left hand is placed, the start lever 7 has a predetermined angle (for example, 10). It is located in a second position tilted downwards in the range (a preferred angle of ° to 30 °).

The start switch 7S (see FIG. 3) is composed of a photo interrupter, and if the start lever 7 is in the first position, it detects that the start lever 7 is off, and if the start lever 7 is in the second position, it starts. Detects that the lever 7 is on.

By configuring the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S in this way, the start lever 7 is kept on by the player simply placing his / her left hand on the start lever 7.

The MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b are provided at positions where the player can easily press the left hand with the fingertip of the left hand while the left hand is placed on the start lever 7. The bet switch 6S (see FIG. 3) is configured by a photo interrupter and functions in the same manner as the bet switch 6S of the first gaming machine.

Similar to the first gaming machine, the information display unit 14 includes a credit lamp 14a. In the second gaming machine, the credit lamp 14a displays the number of credited gaming values. On the credit lamp 14a, the number of game values up to an appropriate value such as 0 to 99999 is displayed.

With the external structure described above, the game can be easily advanced by appropriately pressing the MAX bet button 6a or the 1-bet button 6b with the fingertips of the left hand while the player places his left hand on the start lever 7. Can be done.

Although FIG. 43 shows an example in which the start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1-bet button 6b and the settlement button 9 are arranged on the left side of the pedestal portion, and the information display unit 14 is arranged on the right side of the pedestal portion. The start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, and the settlement button 9 may be arranged on the right side of the pedestal portion, or the information display unit 14 may be arranged on the left side of the pedestal portion.

[10-6. Action effect]
As described above, in the second gaming machine, even when the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S, the bet operation is not detected after the bet number is determined to be the maximum bet number. By starting the game with this as an opportunity, the operation of the start lever 7 is not invalidated even if the start lever 7 is operated before the bet operation. Therefore, in the second gaming machine, it is possible for the player to proceed with the game while the start lever 7 is on, so that the gaming operation can be smoothly performed.

Further, in the second gaming machine, even if the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S in the operating state of the re-game, the detection state of the bet switch 6S is changed from on to off after the automatic closing is completed. Since the game is started when the game is started, the game operation can be smoothly performed even in the operating state of the re-game.

Further, in the second gaming machine, even if the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S in the operating state of the re-game, the detection state of the bet switch 6S is changed from on to off after the automatic closing is completed. Since the game is started when the start operation is no longer detected by the start switch 7S or the start switch 7S, the game operation can be smoothly performed even in the operating state of the re-game.

Further, even if the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S, the second gaming machine starts when the number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets and if the game can be played with the current number of bets. Since the game is started when the start operation is detected again by the switch 7S, the game operation can be smoothly performed even for a player who intends to start the game with less than the maximum number of bets. ..

In addition, when the number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets in the state where the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S, the second gaming machine plays the game when the number of bets is determined to be the maximum number of bets. Since it starts, the game operation can be smoothly performed.

Further, in the second gaming machine, if the next game in which one game is completed can be played with less than the maximum number of bets and the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S, the start lever 7 In order to notify the off message, the player has room to change the number of bets when it is advantageous to play with less than the maximum number of bets and when it is not disadvantageous to play with less than the maximum number of bets. Can be given.

Further, the second game machine latches the random number generated by the random number circuit 110 by the latch signal generated by the latch signal generation circuit shown in FIG. 37, and determines the internal winning combination based on the latched random number. Even when the game is started while the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S, the internal winning combination can be determined at the timing when the game is started.

Further, the second gaming machine determines that the latch signal is effective for the progress of the game based on the detection signal of the MAX bet button 6a, the detection signal of the 1-bet button 6b, and the detection signal of the start switch 7S. In some cases, the internal winning combination is determined, so that it is possible to prevent the internal winning combination from being determined based on an invalid latch signal.

Further, after receiving the initialization command or the winning operation command, the second game machine has passed a certain time or more since it was determined that the game was started based on various data included in the medal insertion command and the input state command. If the start command is not received even after that, communication error processing such as notifying a communication error between the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200 is executed, so that the communication error processing between the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200 is executed. You can check the communication status of.

[10-7. Modification example]
The second gaming machine described above starts the game when the detection state of the bet switch 6S is changed from on to off (off-edge) while the start lever 7 is kept on. In the example, the game is started when the maximum number of bets is set while the start lever 7 is kept on.

[10-7-1. Game flow (variation example)]
Hereinafter, the flow of the game of the modified example of the second gaming machine will be described with reference to the time charts shown in FIGS. 44 to 45. The flow of the game when the game or the re-game is started from the state where the start lever is off is the same as the flow of the game described with reference to each time chart shown in FIGS. 38 to 39. , The description is omitted.

[10-7-1-1. Game flow when the game is started from the state where the start lever is on]
With reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 44, the flow of the game when the game excluding the re-game is started from the state where the start lever 7 is on will be described. The horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 44 are the same as the horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 38.

When the MAX bet button 6a is turned on at time t41 while the start lever 7 is on, the closing process is started and the maximum bet number (specified number) is set.

At time t42, when the closing process is completed, the start lever 7 is enabled, the game is started, the start lever 7 is disabled, the random number acquisition process is executed, and then the internal lottery process and the reel rotation start process are executed. , Reel stop control process, and process after reel stop are executed in sequence.

In FIG. 44, when the 1-bet button 6b is turned on at the time t41, the game is not started even if the 1-bet button 6b is turned off at the time t43. Similarly, if the number of bets is less than the maximum number at time t41, the game is not started. However, at the start of the game, if the number of bets is 1 and the game can be executed, the game is started when the 1-bet button 6b is turned off.

When the game is not started in this way, if the game is possible with the current number of bets, the start lever 7 is turned off and the game is started when the start lever 7 is turned on again. Further, even if the start lever 7 remains on, the game is started when the number of bets reaches the maximum number of bets by turning on the MAX bet button 6a or turning on the 1-bet button 6b.

Further, if the next game after one game is completed can be executed with less than the maximum number of bets and the start lever 7 is on, the main CPU 101 can be a speaker group connected to the sub-relay board 74. A notification unit such as the main display device 210 connected to the sub-control board 72 is notified of a message prompting the start lever 7 to be turned off.

[10-7-1-2. Game flow when re-game is started from the state where the start lever is on]
With reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 45, the flow of the game when the re-game is started from the state where the start lever 7 is on will be described. The horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 45 are the same as the horizontal axis and the vertical axis of FIG. 38.

In the state where the start lever 7 is turned on in the re-game activated in the first game, the charging process by automatic charging is started at time t51, and when the charging process is completed at time t52, the start lever 7 is in the effective state. , The game is started, the start lever 7 is disabled, the random number acquisition process is executed, and then the internal lottery process, the reel rotation start process, the reel stop control process, and the process after the reel stop are sequentially executed.

[10-7-2. Main processing (transformation example)]
With reference to FIG. 46, the main process (main operation process) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 in the modified example of the second gaming machine will be described.

First, in step S421, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection state of the bet switch 6S has changed from off to on. For example, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the on-edge of the MAX bet button 6a is detected.

If it is determined that the detection state of the bet switch 6S has changed from off to on (YES), the process of step S422 is executed. If it is determined that the detection state of the bet switch 6S is not turned on from off (NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S421.

In step S422, the main CPU 101 executes the closing process. The process executed in the insertion process corresponds to the process of steps S41 to S49 of the medal acceptance / start check process shown in FIG. 25. After executing the process of step S422, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S423.

In step S423, the main CPU 101 executes the settlement button check process. In the operating state of the re-game, the main CPU 101 skips the settlement button check process. After executing the process of step S423, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S424.

In step S424, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the detection state of the start switch 7S is ON. That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever 7 is on.

If it is determined that the detection state of the start switch 7S is ON (YES), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S425. If it is determined that the detection state of the start switch 7S is not ON (NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S423.

In step S425, the main CPU 101 executes a random number acquisition process. The process executed by the random number acquisition process corresponds to the process of step S4 of the main process shown in FIG. 23. However, as the random number value for internal lottery, a 2-byte hard latch random number is acquired from the random number register 0 as described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. After executing the process of step S425, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S426.

In step S426, the main CPU 101 executes the lottery process. The process executed in the lottery process corresponds to the process of step S5 of the main process shown in FIG. 23. After executing the process of step S426, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S427.

In step S427, the main CPU 101 executes the rotation process. The process executed in the rotation process corresponds to the process of steps S6 to S11 of the main process shown in FIG. 23. After executing the process of step S427, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S428.

In step S428, the main CPU 101 executes the stop process. The process executed in the stop process corresponds to the process of steps S12 to S16 and S2 of the main process shown in FIG. 23. After executing the process of step S428, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S429.

In step S429, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the replay has been activated. If it is determined that the replay has been activated (YES), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S422. If it is determined that the replay has not been activated (NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S421.

[10-7-3. Action effect (variation example)]
As described above, in the modified example of the second gaming machine, even when the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S, the game is played with the bet number determined to be the maximum bet number. By starting, the operation of the start lever 7 is not invalidated even if the start lever 7 is operated before the bet operation. Therefore, in the second gaming machine, it is possible for the player to proceed with the game while the start lever 7 is on, so that the gaming operation can be smoothly performed.

Further, in the modified example of the second gaming machine, even if the start operation is detected by the start switch 7S in the operating state of the re-game, the game is started when the automatic loading is completed. , The game operation can be smoothly performed even in the operating state of the re-game.

<Additional notes>
Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-202330 proposes a conventional gaming machine in which a gaming medium is inserted by operating a bet button or the like and then a game is started by operating a start lever.

However, in such a gaming machine, if the start lever is operated before the loading of the gaming medium is completed, the operation of the start lever becomes invalid, so that the gaming operation is smooth depending on the player. There was a problem that there were some things that could not be done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing a gaming operation.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

<< First invention >>
A game value number determination unit (for example, main CPU 101) that determines a game value number to be used for a game, and
A start operation detection unit (for example, start switch 7S) that detects the start operation of the game, and
A game control unit (for example, the main control circuit 100) that controls the game, and
With
The game control unit
In the state where the start operation is not detected by the start operation detection unit, the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit after the game value number is determined by the game value number determination unit. A gaming machine characterized by starting a game.
<< Second invention >>
In the state where the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, the game control unit is triggered by the game value number determination unit determining the game value number to a specified number (for example, the maximum bet number). The gaming machine described above, characterized in that the gaming is started as.
<< Third invention >>
The game control unit
In the operating state of the re-game, when the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, the game value number used for the re-game by the game value number determination unit is the game in which the re-game is activated. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that the game is started when the number of game values used is determined.
<< Fourth invention >>
A determination operation detection unit (for example, a bet switch 6S) for detecting a determination operation for causing the game value number determination unit to determine the game value number to be used for the game from the game value number deposited in the game machine is provided.
The game control unit
While the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, the game value number determination unit determines the game value number to the specified number, and then the determination operation detection unit continues to detect the determination operation. If so, the gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the game is started when the determination operation is no longer detected by the determination operation detection unit.
<< Fifth Invention >>
The game control unit
In the operating state of the re-game, when the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, the determination operation is not detected from the detection operation detection unit. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it initiates a replay.
<< Sixth Invention >>
The game control unit
In the operating state of the re-game, when the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, the re-game is started when the start operation is no longer detected by the start operation detection unit. The gaming machine described above as a feature.
<< Seventh Invention >>
The specified number is the maximum number of game values that can be used for the game.
When the game value number determined by the game value number determination unit is less than the maximum number in a state where the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, the game control unit is the start operation detection unit. The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the gaming is started when the starting operation is detected again.
<< Eighth Invention >>
The game control unit determines the game value number when the game value number determined by the game value number determination unit is less than the maximum number in a state where the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the game is started when the number of game values is determined to be the maximum number by the unit.
<< Ninth invention >>
A notification unit (for example, a speaker group, a main display device 210) for notifying a player is provided.
If the next game in which one game is completed can be played with a game value less than the maximum number, and the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, the game control unit is in a state where the start operation is detected. The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that a notification unit is notified of a message prompting the interruption of the start operation.
<< 10th invention >>
A first decision operation detection unit (for example, determination of a MAX bet button 6a) that detects a first decision operation for determining the number of game values to be used for a game from the number of game values deposited in the game machine to the specified number. Bet switch 6S) that detects the operation and
A second determination operation detection unit that detects a second determination operation for determining a predetermined number (for example, 1) equal to or less than the specified number from the number of game values deposited in the game machine. (For example, a bet switch 6S that detects a determination operation of the 1-bet button 6b).
The game control unit
A first circuit (for example, XOR circuit 140) that generates a first signal composed of an exclusive OR of the detection signal of the first determination operation detection unit and the detection signal of the second determination operation detection unit.
A second circuit (for example, AND circuit 141) that generates a latch signal composed of a logical product of the detection signal of the start operation detection unit and the first signal, and
It has a random number circuit (for example, a random number circuit 110) that generates random numbers in a predetermined cycle, and has.
The random number circuit latches a random number generated in the predetermined cycle by the latch signal.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the gaming control unit determines a winning combination of a game based on a random number latched by the latch signal.
<< 11th invention >>
Whether or not the latch signal is valid in the game control unit based on the levels of the detection signal of the first determination operation detection unit, the detection signal of the second determination operation detection unit, and the detection signal of the start operation detection unit. Further has a latch signal determination means for determining
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the gaming control unit determines the winning combination when the latch signal is determined to be valid.
<< 12th invention >>
A production control unit (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) that controls the production is provided.
The game control unit
A first command (for example, an input state command) indicating the state of the game value number determination unit and the start operation detection unit, and
A second command (for example, a start command) indicating that the game has started is transmitted to the effect control unit.
The effect control unit
The above description, wherein if the second command is not received even after a certain period of time (for example, 1 ms) or more has passed since it is determined that the game has been started based on the first command, error processing is executed. Game machine.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the gaming operation can be smoothly performed.

1 Pachislot machine (game machine)
6S bet switch (decision operation detection unit, first determination operation detection unit, second determination operation detection unit)
7S start switch (start operation detector)
100 Main control circuit (game control unit)
101 Main CPU 101 (game value determination unit, latch signal determination means)
110 Random number circuit 140 XOR circuit (1st circuit)
141 AND circuit (second circuit)
200 Sub-control circuit (directing control unit)
210 Main display device (notification unit)

Claims (1)

The game value number determination unit that determines the game value number to be used for the game,
A start operation detection unit that detects the start operation of the game,
A game control unit that controls games,
A determination operation detection unit that detects a determination operation that causes the game value number determination unit to determine the game value number to be used for the game from the game value number deposited in the game control unit.
With
The game control unit
In the state where the start operation is not detected by the start operation detection unit, the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit after the game value number is determined by the game value number determination unit. Start the game ,
In the state where the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, the game is started when the game value number is determined to the specified number by the game value number determination unit.
In the operating state of the re-game, when the start operation is detected by the start operation detection unit, the determination operation is not detected from the detection operation detection unit. A gaming machine characterized by starting a replay.

Images